Download DVP-NS715P - Philips Parts and Accessories

DVP-NS715P
RMT-D145A
SERVICE MANUAL
US Model
Canadian Model
Photo: Titanium gray type
SPECIFICATIONS
System
Outputs
General
Laser: Semiconductor laser
Signal format system: NTSC
(Jack name: Jack type/Output level/Load
impedance)
LINE OUT (AUDIO) 1/2: Phono jack/
2 Vrms/10 kilohms
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL): Optical
output jack/–18 dBm (wave length:
660 nm)
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, P B, PR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p/
75 ohms
LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2: Phono jack/
1.0 Vp-p/75 ohms
S VIDEO OUT 1/2: 4-pin mini DIN/Y:
1.0 Vp-p, C: 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
Power requirements: 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 13 W
Dimensions (approx.): 430 × 74 × 255 mm
(17 × 2 7/8 × 10 1/8 in.) (width/height/
depth) incl. projecting parts
Mass (approx.): 2.4 kg (5 19/64 lb)
Operating temperature: 5 ° C to 35 ° C
(41 ° F to 95 ° F)
Operating humidity: 25 % to 80 %
Audio characteristics
Frequency response: DVD VIDEO (PCM
96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz (±1.0 dB)/DVD
VIDEO (PCM 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz
(±0.5 dB)/CD: 2 Hz to 20 kHz (±0.5 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio): 115 dB
(LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks
only)
Harmonic distortion: 0.003 %
Dynamic range: DVD VIDEO: 103 dB/CD:
99 dB
Wow and flutter: Less than detected value
(±0.001% W PEAK)
The signals from LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO)
1/2 jacks are measured. When you play PCM
sound tracks with a 96 kHz sampling
frequency, the output signals from the
DIGITA L OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack are converted to 48 kHz sampling
frequency.
Supplied accessories
See page 15.
Specifications and design are subject to
change without notice.
ENERGY STAR R is a U.S. registered mark.
As an ENERGY STARR Partner, Sony
Corporation has determined that this product
meets the ENERGY STAR R guidelines for
energy efficiency.
SACD/DVD PLAYER
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer:
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
“pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors.
LEAKAGE TEST
The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground
and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having
a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA (500 microamperes).
Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them
out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA
WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these
instruments.
4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245
digital multimeter is suitable for this job.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder
splashes and bridges.
3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a
VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The “limit” indication is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate lowvoltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery
operated digital multimeters that have a 2V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A)
5. Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the
replacement of any such line cord to the customer.
6. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
7. Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, “metallized” knobs,
screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage.
Check leakage as described below.
Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
To Exposed Metal
Parts on Set
0.15 µF
1.5 kΩ
: LEAD FREE MARK
Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur
such as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
AC
voltmeter
(0.75 V)
Earth Ground
Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.
WARNING!!
CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
hazard.
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER
EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS
NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION,
BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF
MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE
OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED
LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE
OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH
SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS
SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0
SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE
DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ
DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES
NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
–2–
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
Page
Section
Title
Page
Service Note ............................................................................ 4
5.
IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1.
5-1.
System Control Pin Function
(MB-104 Board IC104) .................................................. 5-1
6.
TEST MODE
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
General Description ......................................................
Starting Test Mode ........................................................
Syscon Diagnosis ..........................................................
Drive Auto Adjustment ..................................................
Drive Manual Operation ................................................
Mecha Aging .................................................................
Emergency History ........................................................
Version Information .......................................................
Video Level Adjustment ................................................
IF CON Self Diagnostic Function ..................................
Troubleshooting .............................................................
7.
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
7-1.
1.
7-2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
7-3.
Power Supply Check .....................................................
HS12A1U .......................................................................
Adjustment of Video System .........................................
Video Level Adjustment ................................................
Progressive Video Output Level Adjustment ................
Checking S Video Output S-Y .......................................
Checking S Video Output S-C .......................................
Checking Component Video Output Y ..........................
Checking Component Video Output B-Y ......................
Checking Component Video Output R-Y ......................
Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement .......................
8.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
GENERAL
Simple Start Guide ........................................................
Hookups ........................................................................
Playing Discs .................................................................
Searching for a Scene ...................................................
Viewing Information About the Disc ..............................
Sound Adjustments .......................................................
Enjoying Movies ............................................................
Using Various Additional Functions ..............................
Settings and Adjustments .............................................
Additional Information ...................................................
2.
DISASSEMBLY
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
Case Removal ...............................................................
Tray Cover Removal ......................................................
Front Panel Block Ass‘y Removal .................................
MB-103 Board Removal ................................................
Power Block Removal ...................................................
AV-63 Board Removal ...................................................
Mechanism Deck Removal ............................................
IF-92 Board Removal ....................................................
Optical Pick-up Removal ...............................................
Internal Views ................................................................
Circuit Boards Location .................................................
3.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
Overall Block Diagram ...................................................
RF/Servo Block Diagram ...............................................
Signal Processor Block Diagram ..................................
System Control Block Diagram .....................................
Video/Audio Block Diagram ..........................................
Interface Control Block Diagram ...................................
Power (1) Block Diagram ..............................................
Power (2) Block Diagram ..............................................
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAMS
4-1.
4-2.
Frame Schematic Diagram ............................................
Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams .........
MS-81 (LOADING) Printed Wiring Board
and Schematic Diagram ................................................
MB-103 Printed Wiring Board .......................................
MB-103 (RF AMP, SERVO) Schematic Diagram ..........
MB-103 (ARP, SERVO DSP) Schematic Diagram ........
MB-103 (AV DECODER) Schematic Diagram ..............
MB-103 (DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ..........................
MB-103 (SYSTEM CONTROL)
Schematic Diagram .......................................................
MB-103 (CLOCK GENERATOR)
Schematic Diagram .......................................................
MB-103 (I/P CONVERTOR) Schematic Diagram .........
MB-103 (VIDEO ENCODER, D/A CONVERTER)
Schematic Diagram .......................................................
AV-63 Printed Wiring Board ..........................................
AV-63 (VIDEO BUFFER) Schematic Diagram ..............
AV-63 (AUDIO AMP) Schematic Diagram ....................
IF-92 Printed Wiring Board ...........................................
IF-92 (IF CON) Schematic Diagram .............................
HS12A1U Printed Wiring Board ....................................
HS12A1U Schematic Diagram ......................................
1-3
1-4
1-6
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-15
1-17
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
3-1
3-3
3-5
3-7
3-9
3-11
3-13
3-15
8-1. Exploded Views .............................................................
8-1-1. Front Panel Assembly ..............................................
8-1-2. Chassis Assembly ....................................................
8-1-3. Mechanism Deck Assembly .....................................
8-2. Electrical Parts List .......................................................
4-3
4-5
4-5
4-7
4-11
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-19
4-21
4-23
4-25
4-27
4-29
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-37
4-39
–3–
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-5
6-7
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-18
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-6
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
SERVICE NOTE
1. DISASSEMBLY
• This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.
Set
Case
(Page 2-1)
Tray Cover Ass'y
(Page 2-1)
MB-103 board
(Page 2-1)
Mechanism Deck
(Page 2-2)
Front Panel Block
Ass'y
(Page 2-1)
Optical Pick-Up
(Page 2-3)
IF-92 Board
(Page 2-2)
AV-63 Board
(Page 2-2)
–4–
Power Block
(Page 2-2)
2. DISC REMOVAL PROCEDURE
(at POWER OFF)
1) Remove the case from the set. (Refer to 2-1)
2) Remove the MB-103 board from the set. (Refer to 2-4)
3) Set the MB-103 board as shown in Fig. 2.
1) Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom,
and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of the arrow
A. (See Fig. 1)
2) Draw out the tray in the direction of the arrow B, and remove
a disc. (See Fig. 1)
Aperture
6 CK-122 board
Lever of chuck cam
1 MB-103 board
4 Two screws
(B3)
5 Connector
(CN601)
B
Tray
3 Connector
(CN101)
A
Fig. 1
2 Stand
Fig. 2
3.
HOW TO SERVICE MB-103 BOARD
• Use the service jig.
4) Set the CK-120 board as shown in Fig. 3.
CK-122 board
(J-6090-129-A)
5 Connector
(CN101)
Stand
CK-121 board
(J-6090-132-A)
6 Two flexible flat cables
(FMO-001: CN201,
FMO-002: CN202)
2 Four screws
(B3)
6 Flexible flat cables
(FMM-035: CN101)
CK-120 board
(J-6090-127-A)
1 CK-120
board
Harness 6P
(J-6090-126-A)
Five flexible flat cables
FFC 26P J-6090-117-A
FFC-9P J-6090-118-A
FFC-5P J-6090-119-A
FFC-15P J-6090-121-A
FFC 25P J-6090-122-A
4 Connector
(CN102)
3 Connector (CN601)
Fig. 3
–5–
5) Set the four flexible flat cables as shown in Fig. 4.
2 Flexible flat cable
(FFC 9P: CN204)
3 Flexible flat cable
(FFC 5P: CN201)
1 Flexible flat cable
(FFC 26P: CN203)
4 Connector
(CN112)
5 Connector
(CN112)
7 Connector
(CN202)
6 Connector
(CN112)
Fig. 6
8 Flexible flat cable
(FFC 15P: CN112)
Fig. 4
6) Set the flexible flat cable and harness as shown in Fig. 5.
2 Flexible flat cable
(FFC 25P: CN114)
1 Connector
(CN301)
4 Harness 6P
(CN110)
3 Connector
(CN102)
Fig. 5
–6–
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 1
GENERAL
About this Manual
• Instructions in this manual describe the
controls on the remote. You can also use the
controls on the player if they have the same
or similar names as those on the remote.
• The meaning of the icons used in this
manual is described below:
Icon
Meaning
Functions available for DVD
VIDEOs or DVD-Rs/DVDRWs in video mode
Functions available for DVDRWs in VR (Video Recording)
mode
Functions available for VIDEO
CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
video CD format
Functions available for DATA
CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CDRWs containing MP3* audio
tracks)
Functions available for music
CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
music CD format
* MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard
format defined by ISO/MPEG which compresses
audio data.
“DVD” may be used as a general term for
DVD VIDEOs, DVD-Rs, and DVD-RWs.
This Player Can Play the
Following Discs
Format of discs
DVD VIDEO
(page 73)
DVD-RW
(page 73)
“DVD VIDEO” and “DVD-RW” are
trademarks.
• A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
card, heart).
• A disc with paper or stickers on it.
• A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane
tape or a sticker still left on it.
Region code
Your player has a region code printed on the
back of the unit and only will play DVD
VIDEO discs (playback only) labeled with
identical region codes. This system is used to
protect copyrights.
DVD VIDEOs labeled
this player.
ALL
X
Notes about the Discs
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
edge. Do not touch the surface.
Note
Some DVD-Rs, DVD-RWs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs
cannot be played on this player due to the recording
quality or physical condition of the disc, or the
characteristics of the recording device.
The disc will not play if it has not been correctly
finalized. Also, discs may not play if they have been
recorded with images that contain CPRM* (Content
Protection for Recordable Media) protection. For
more information, see the operating instructions for
the recording device. Note that discs created in the
Packet Write format cannot be played.
* CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects the
copyright of images.
will also play on
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the
message “Playback prohibited by area
limitations.” will appear on the TV screen.
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region
code indication may be labeled even though
playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by
area restrictions.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it
in a car parked in direct sunlight as the
temperature may rise considerably inside
the car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
Wipe the disc from the center out.
Note on playback operations of
DVDs and VIDEO CDs
Region code
DVP–XXXX
00V 00Hz
00W
This section is extracted from instruction
manual (3-074-927-11).
NO.
0-000-000-00
Some playback operations of DVDs and
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by
software producers. Since this player plays
DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc
contents the software producers designed,
some playback features may not be available.
Also, refer to the instructions supplied with
the DVDs or VIDEO CDs.
Example of discs that the player
cannot play
The player cannot play the following discs:
• All CD-ROMs (including PHOTO CDs)/
CD-Rs/CD-RWs other than those recorded
in the following formats:
–music CD format
–video CD format
–MP3 format that conforms to ISO9660*
Level 1/Level 2, or its extended format,
Joliet
• Data part of CD-Extras
• DVD-ROMs
• DVD Audio discs
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs
Copyrights
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U.S. patents, other
intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation, and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
* A logical format of files and folders on CDROMs, defined by ISO (International Standard
Organization).
VIDEO CD
Also, the player cannot play the following
discs:
Music CD
• A DVD VIDEO with a different region
code.
• A disc recorded in a color system other than
NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM (this player
conforms to the NTSC color system).
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
6
7
Front panel display
Index to Parts and Controls
When playing back a DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.
Front panel
Playing status
Disc type
Current audio
signal (48)
Current title and chapter (45)
Current audio
Lights up when you can change the angle (51)
signal (48)
Current play
mode (36)
Playing time (45)
When playing back a VIDEO CD with Playback Control (PBC) (33)
A [/1 (on/standby) button/indicator (28)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Lights up in green when the power is on
and lights up in red when the player is in
standby mode.
PROGRESSIVE indicator (66)
Disc tray (28)
A (open/close) button (28)
./> (previous/next) buttons (29)
C/X/x/c ENTER buttons (32)
TOP MENU button (32)
MENU button (32) (34)
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
O RETURN button (29)
DISPLAY button (12)
x (stop) button (29)
X (pause) button (29)
H (play) button (28)
Front panel display (9)
(remote sensor) (15)
SURROUND button (49)
PICTURE MODE button (53)
Disc type
Playing status
Current play mode (36)
Playing time (45)
Current scene (45)
When playing back a CD, DATA CD (MP3 audio), or VIDEO CD (without PBC)
Disc type
Playing status
Current play mode (36)
Lights up when
playing MP3
audio tracks (34)
Playing time (45)
Current track and index (45)
,continued
8
1-1
9
Rear panel
Remote
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
S VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
A TV [/1 (on/standby) button (61)
B Z OPEN/CLOSE button (29)
C Number buttons (32)
SELECTABLE
D
E
F
G
H
I
L
1
PB
2
2
PR
PROGRESSIVE
SCAN SELECT
A DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22)
(23) (24)
B DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack (22)
(23) (24)
C LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks
(21) (22) (23)
D LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks (18)
The number 5 button has a tactile dot.*
CLEAR button (36)
SUBTITLE button (51)
AUDIO button (48)
REPEAT button (39)
TIME/TEXT button (44)
./> PREV/NEXT (previous/
next) buttons (29)
J c / C SEARCH/STEP
buttons (30)
K X PAUSE button (29)
L H PLAY button (28)
INTERLACE
1
E S VIDEO OUT 1/2 jacks (18)
F COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks
(18)
G COMPONENT VIDEO OUT/SCAN
SELECT switch (65)
M
N
O
P
Q
The H button has a tactile dot.*
C/X/x/c buttons (32)
DISPLAY button (12)
TOP MENU button (32)
[/1 (on/standby) button (28)
VOL (volume) +/– buttons (61)
The + button has a tactile dot.*
R TV/VIDEO button (61)
S ENTER button (performs the same
function as wl)
T WIDE MODE button (61)
U ANGLE button (51)
V PICTURE NAVI (picture navigation)
button (42)
W SUR (surround) button (49)
X PICTURE MODE button (53)
Y REPLAY button (29)
Z SEARCH MODE button (41)
wj
m/M
SCAN/SLOW
buttons (30)
wk x STOP button (29)
wl ENTER button (25)
e; O RETURN button (29)
ea MENU button (32) (34)
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
the player.
10
11
List of Control Menu Items
Guide to the Control Menu Display
Item
Selects the title, scene, or track to be played.
CHAPTER (page 41)/INDEX (page 41)
, Control Menu display 1
m
Control Menu display 2 (DVD/VIDEO CD only)
m
ADVANCED display (DVD only. See page 46.)
m
Control Menu display off
Selects the chapter or index to be played.
ALBUM (page 34)
Selects the album to be played.
TRACK (page 41)
Selects the track to be played.
INDEX (page 41)
z Hint
You can skip the ADVANCED display by setting
“OFF” under “ADVANCED” in the Control Menu
(page 46).
Selects the index to be played.
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST (page 32)
Selects the type of titles (DVD-RW) to be played, the ORIGINAL one, or an edited
PLAY LIST.
Control Menu Display
TIME/TEXT (page 41)
The Control Menu display 1 and 2 will show different items depending on the disc type. For
details about each item, please refer to the pages in the parentheses.
Checks the elapsed time and the remaining playback time.
Input the time code for picture and music searching.
Displays the DVD/CD/DATA CD text.
Example: Control Menu display 1 when playing a DVD VIDEO.
AUDIO (page 48)
Currently playing chapter number**
Changes the audio setting.
Currently playing title number*
SUBTITLE (page 51)
Displays the subtitles.
Changes the subtitle language.
Total number of titles*
Total number of chapters**
Control Menu items
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
Selected item
Function name of
selected Control
Menu item
Operation message
Item Name, Function, Relevant Disc Type
TITLE (page 41)/SCENE (page 41)/TRACK (page 41)
Use the Control Menu to select a function and to view related information. Press DISPLAY
repeatedly to turn on or change the Control Menu display as follows:
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
ANGLE (page 51)
Changes the angle.
TVS (TV Virtual Surround) (page 49)
Type of disc
being played
Selects the surround functions.
Playing time
Displays the information (bit rate or layer) of the disc currently playing.
ADVANCED (page 46)
Current setting
OFF
OFF
1: ENGLISH
2: FRENCH
3: SPANISH
SUBTITLE
Select:
Playback status
(N Playback,
X Pause,
x Stop, etc.)
PARENTAL CONTROL (page 56)
Set to prohibit playback on this player.
Options
SETUP (page 63)
ENTER
QUICK Setup (page 25)
Use Quick Setup to choose the desired language of the on-screen display, the aspect
ratio of the TV and the audio output.
CUSTOM Setup
In addition to the Quick Setup setting, you can adjust other various settings.
RESET
Returns the settings in “SETUP” to the default setting.
Cancel: RETURN
*
Displays the scene number for VIDEO CDs
(PBC is on), track number for VIDEO CDs/
CDs, album number for DATA CDs.
** Displays the index number for VIDEO CDs/
CDs, MP3 audio track number for DATA CDs.
PROGRAM (page 36)
Selects the title, chapter, or track to play in the order you want.
,continued
12
1-2
13
SHUFFLE (page 38)
Plays the title, chapter, or track in random order.
Simple Start Guide
REPEAT (page 39)
Quick Overview
A-B REPEAT (page 39)
A quick overview presented in this guide will
give you enough information to start using the
player for your enjoyment. To use the
surround sound features of this player, refer
to “Hookups” on page 18.
Specifies the parts you want to play repeatedly.
BNR (page 52)
Adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that
appear on your TV screen.
CUSTOM PICTURE MODE (page 53)
You can control the player using the supplied
remote. Insert two Size AA (R6) batteries by
matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries
to the markings inside the compartment.
When using the remote, point it at the remote
sensor
on the player.
Simple Start Guide
Plays the entire disc (all titles/all tracks/all albums) repeatedly or one title/chapter/
track/album repeatedly.
Step 2: Inserting
Batteries into the
Remote
Notes
Adjusts the video signal from the player. You can select the picture quality that best
suits the program you are watching.
• You cannot connect this player to a TV that does
not have a video input jack.
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord of each
component before connecting.
DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 55)
Exaggerates the outline of the image to produce a sharper picture.
PICTURE NAVIGATION (page 42)
Divides the screen into 9 subscreens to help you find the scene you want quickly.
Step 1: Unpacking
Check that you have the following items:
• Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug
× 3) (1)
• Remote commander (remote) (1)
• Size AA (R6) batteries (2)
z Hint
The Control Menu icon indicator lights up in green
when you select any item
t
except “OFF.” (“TVS,” “PROGRAM,”
“SHUFFLE,” “REPEAT,” “A-B REPEAT,”
“BNR,” “DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER” only).
The “ANGLE” indicator lights up in green only
when the angles can be changed. The “CUSTOM
PICTURE MODE” indicator lights up in green
when any setting other than “STANDARD” is
selected.
Notes
• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or
humid place.
• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote
casing, particularly when replacing the batteries.
• Do not expose the remote sensor to direct light
from the sun or a lighting apparatus. Doing so
may cause a malfunction.
• If you do not use the remote for an extended
period of time, remove the batteries to avoid
possible damage from battery leakage and
corrosion.
15
14
Step 3: TV Hookups
Step 4: Playing a Disc
Connect the supplied audio/video cord and the power cord in the order (1~3) shown below.
Be sure to connect the power cord last.
Simple Start Guide
TV
1 Audio/video
to video input
INPUT
cord (supplied)
VIDEO
(yellow)
L
(white)
AUDIO
R
(red)
to audio input
With the playback side facing down
to LINE OUT
L/R (AUDIO)1
or 2
to LINE OUT
(VIDEO)1 or 2
A Turn on the TV.
B Press [/1 on the player.
LINE OUT
AUDIO
R
C Switch the input selector on your
TV so that the signal from the
player appears on the TV screen.
VIDEO
L
1
2
2 Power source
D Press A on the player to open the
disc tray.
CD/DVD Player
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
S VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
SELECTABLE
L
INTERLACE
1
1
PB
2
2
PR
PROGRESSIVE
When connecting to a wide screen TV
Depending on the disc, the image may not fit
your TV screen.
If you want to change the aspect ratio, please
refer to page 65.
When connecting to a TV that accepts
progressive (480p) format signals
3 Power source
Depending on the disc, a menu may be
displayed on the TV screen. If so, select the
item you want from the menu and play the
DVD VIDEO (page 32) or VIDEO CD disc
(page 33).
To stop playing
Press x.
To remove the disc
E Place the disc on the tray with the
playback side facing down.
Press A.
F Press H.
Press [/1. The player enters standby mode
and the power indicator lights up in red.
SCAN SELECT
l : Signal flow
After Step 6
The disc tray closes and the player begins
playing the disc.
To turn off the player
z Hint
When connecting to a monaural TV, use a stereomono conversion cord (not supplied). Connect the
LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jack on the player to the
TV’s video input jack, and connect the LINE OUT
L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks to the TV’s audio input
jack.
You need to use the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT jacks to view progressive signals. Hook
up your TV using pattern C on page 18, and
then run Quick Setup on page 25.
16
17
1-3
A If you are connecting to a video input jack
Hookups
Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. You will
enjoy standard quality images.
Hooking Up the Player
Yellow (Video)
White (L)
Yellow (Video)
Red (R)
Red (R)
Hookups
Follow Steps 1 to 4 to hook up and adjust the settings of the player.
Before you start, disconnect the power cords, check that you have all of the supplied accessories,
and insert the batteries into the remote (page 15).
White (L)
Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 21). (Do this if you are
connecting to a TV only.)
Notes
• Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.
B If you are connecting to an S VIDEO input jack
Connect an S VIDEO cord (not supplied). You will enjoy high quality images.
Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords
Connect this player to your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord.
Select one of the patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,
projector, or AV amplifier (receiver).
A
INPUT
Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video
cord (not supplied) or three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will
enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images. If your TV accepts progressive
(480p) format signals, you must use this connection and set “COMPONENT OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE” in “SCREEN SETUP” (page 65).
C
Audio/video
cord
(supplied)
(yellow)
VIDEO
C If you are connecting to a monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)
having component video input jacks (Y, PB, PR)
Component
video cord
(not supplied)
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y
(green)
Green
Blue
Green
(blue)
(red)
Red
Red
PB
L
PR
AUDIO
Blue
R
TV, projector or AV
amplifier (receiver)
TV, projector or AV
amplifier (receiver)
Notes
• Do not connect the player to a VCR. If you pass the player signals via the VCR, you may not receive a clear
image on the TV screen.
(yellow)
(green)
(blue)
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
VCR
to COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
to LINE OUT (VIDEO)1 or 2
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
(red)
CD/DVD player
SELECTABLE
L
INTERLACE
1
1
PB
2
2
PR
TV
Connect
directly
PROGRESSIVE
CD/DVD player
SCAN SELECT
to S VIDEO OUT 1 or 2
• Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and
may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In the case of 480 progressive scan picture problems, it
is recommended that you switch the connection to the standard definition output. If there are questions
regarding your Sony TV set’s compatibility with this model 480p DVD player, please contact our customer
service center.
INPUT
S VIDEO
S VIDEO cord
(not supplied)
l : Signal flow
TV, projector or AV
amplifier (receiver)
B
18
19
Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords
Connecting to your TV
A
This connection will use your TV speakers for sound.
Refer to the chart below to select the connection that best suits your system. Be sure to also read
the instructions for the components you wish to connect.
CD/DVD player
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
SELECTABLE
L
Hookups
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
INTERLACE
Select a connection
1
1
PB
2
2
PR
PROGRESSIVE
SCAN SELECT
Select one of the following connections,
A
through
Components to be connected
TV
• Surround effects: TVS DYNAMIC (page 50),
TVS WIDE (page 50)
D .
Connection
A
(page 21)
A
Your setup
example
LINE OUT
AUDIO
R
VIDEO
(yellow)*
(yellow)
(white)
(white)
TV
L
1
2
(red)
Stereo amplifier (receiver) and two speakers
• Surround effects: TVS STANDARD (page 50)
or
MD deck/DAT deck
• Surround effects: none
B
(page 22)
example
Audio/video
cord (supplied)
to LINE OUT L/R
(AUDIO) 1 or 2
(red)
to audio input
l : Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page
18).
AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby*
Surround (Pro Logic) decoder and 3 to 6
speakers
• Surround effects: Dolby Surround (Pro Logic)
(page 73)
C
(page 23)
example
AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack
having a Dolby Digital or DTS** decoder and 6
speakers
• Surround effects: Dolby Digital (5.1ch) (page 73),
DTS (5.1ch) (page 73)
D
(page 24)
example
z Hint
When connecting to a monaural TV, use a stereomono conversion cord (not supplied). Connect the
LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks to the TV’s
audio input jack.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
** “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
20
,continued
1-4
21
C Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Surround (Pro
Logic) decoder and 3 to 6 speakers
If the stereo amplifier (receiver) has audio input jacks L and R only, use B-1 . If the amplifier
(receiver) has a digital input jack, or when connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck, use B-2 .
In this case, you can also connect the player directly to the MD deck or DAT deck without using
your stereo amplifier (receiver).
You can enjoy the Dolby Surround effects only when playing Dolby Surround audio or multichannel audio (Dolby Digital) discs.
If your amplifier (receiver) has L and R audio input jacks only, use C-1 . If your amplifier
(receiver) has a digital input jack, use C-2 .
CD/DVD player
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
CD/DVD player
S VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
DIGITAL OUT
SELECTABLE
INTERLACE
1
PB
2
2
PR
LINE OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
L
1
S VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
1
1
PB
2
2
PR
PROGRESSIVE
SCAN SELECT
B-2
B-1
DIGITAL OUT
C-2
Coaxial digital cord
(not supplied)
LINE OUT
AUDIO
R
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
VIDEO
(red)
to DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
R
or
to coaxial or optical
digital input
or
(red)
to DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
to audio input
(white)
(red)
to audio input
to coaxial or optical digital
input
[Speakers]
[Speakers]
[Speakers]
2
to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1 or 2
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Remove jack cap
before connecting
(red)
VIDEO
L
1
2
to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1 or 2
(white)
LINE OUT
AUDIO
L
1
or
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Remove jack cap
before connecting
C-1
Stereo
audio cord (not
supplied)
(white)
DIGITAL OUT
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied) (white)
Coaxial digital
cord (not supplied)
or
SELECTABLE
L
INTERLACE
PROGRESSIVE
SCAN SELECT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
Hookups
B Connecting to a stereo amplifier (receiver) and 2 speakers/Connecting to
an MD deck or DAT deck
Amplifier (receiver) with Dolby
Surround decoder
Stereo amplifier (receiver)
Front (L)
MD deck/DAT deck
Rear (L)
Front (L)
Rear (R)
Front (R)
Front (R)
l: Signal flow
l: Signal flow
z Hint
In connection B-1 , you can use the supplied
audio/video cord instead of using a separate stereo
audio cord.
Subwoofer
Rear (mono)
Center
Note
Note
When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural
rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers
and a subwoofer.
If you select one of the TVS effects (page 49) while
playing a disc, no sound will come from your
speakers with the B-2 connection.
,continued
22
D Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having
a Dolby Digital or DTS decoder and 6 speakers
Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord
This connection will allow you to use the Dolby Digital or DTS decoder function of your AV
amplifier (receiver). You are unable to enjoy the surround sound effects of this player.
Plug the player and TV power cords into an AC outlet.
Hookups
CD/DVD player
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
S VIDEO
OUT
Step 4: Quick Setup
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
SELECTABLE
L
INTERLACE
1
1
PB
2
2
PR
PROGRESSIVE
Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of basic adjustments for using the player.
To skip an adjustment, press >. To return to the previous adjustment, press ..
SCAN SELECT
D
[/1
DIGITAL OUT
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
Coaxial digital cord
(not supplied)
to coaxial digital
input
Rear (L)
X/x
or
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Remove jack cap
before connecting
AV amplifier (receiver) having
a decoder
Subwoofer
Rear (R)
[Speakers]
Front (L)
ENTER
1 Turn on the TV.
2 Press [/1.
3 Switch the input selector on your
to optical digital input
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
5 Press X/x to select a language.
./>
to DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL or
OPTICAL)
[Speakers]
23
The player uses the language selected
here to display the menu and subtitles as
well.
6 Press ENTER.
The Setup Display for selecting the
aspect ratio of the TV to be connected
appears.
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
COMPONENT OUT:
MODE:
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 PAN SCAN
16:9
AUTO
TV so that the signal from the
player appears on the TV screen.
“Press [ENTER] to run QUICK SETUP”
appears at the bottom of the screen. If this
message does not appear, select
“QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control
Menu to run Quick Setup (page 64).
Center
Front (R)
4 Press ENTER without inserting a
l: Signal flow
disc.
Note
The Setup Display for selecting the
language used in the on-screen display
appears.
After you have completed the connection, be sure to
set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to “DOLBY DIGITAL”
and “DTS” to “ON” in Quick Setup (page 25).
7 Press X/x to select the setting that
matches your TV type.
◆ If you have a 4:3 standard TV
• 4:3 LETTER BOX or 4:3 PAN SCAN
(page 65)
◆ If you have a wide-screen TV or a 4:3
standard TV with a wide-screen mode
• 16:9 (page 65)
8 Press ENTER.
The Setup Display for selecting the type
of video signal appears.
,continued
24
1-5
25
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
4:3 LETTER BOX
SCREEN SAVER:
ON
BACKGROUND:
JACKET PICTURE
INTERLACE
COMPONENT OUT:
MODE:
INTERLACE
PROGRESSIVE
B-2
C-2
15Press ENTER.
D
• Select “DIGITAL OUTPUT.” The Setup
Display for “DOLBY DIGITAL” appears.
Quick Setup is finished. All connections
and setup operations are complete.
12Press X/x to select the type of
9 Press X/x to select the type of
signals you wish to output to your
TV.
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
D-PCM
DTS:
DOLBY DIGITAL
◆ Interlace format TV (standard TV)
• INTERLACE (pages 65)
Audio Connection (pages 21 to 24)
A
• No additional settings are needed.
◆ Progressive format TV
• PROGRESSIVE (pages 65)
B-2
C-2
B-1
• D-PCM (page 69)
10Press ENTER.
Is this player connected to an amplifier
(receiver) ? Select the type of jack you
are using.
• DOLBY DIGITAL (only if the
amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby Digital
decoder) (page 69)
13Press ENTER.
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
DTS:
OFF
OFF
ON
NO
11Press X/x to select the type of
jack (if any) you are using to
connect to an amplifier (receiver),
then press ENTER.
Choose the item that matches the audio
connection you selected on pages 21 to
24 ( A through D ).
A
• If you connect just a TV and nothing
else, select “NO.” Quick Setup is
finished and connections are complete.
C-1
• Select “LINE OUTPUT L/R
(AUDIO).” Quick Setup is finished and
connections are complete.
B-2
C-2
D
• Set “DOWNMIX” to “DOLBY
SURROUND” (page 69)
• Set “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON” (page 69)
“DTS” is selected.
YES
LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO)
DIGITAL OUTPUT
C-1
• Set “DOWNMIX” to “DOLBY
SURROUND” (page 69)
• If the sound distorts even when the volume
is turned down, set “AUDIO ATT” to “ON”
(page 68)
D
The Setup Display for selecting the type
of jack used to connect your amplifier
(receiver) appears.
B-1
To enjoy the surround sound effects of this
player or your amplifier (receiver), set the
following items as described below for the
audio connection you selected on pages 22 to
24 ( B through D ). Each of these is the
default setting and does not need to be adjusted
when you first connect the player. Refer to
page 63 for using the Setup Display.
Choose the signal that matches the audio
connection you selected on pages 22 to
24 ( B through D ).
Select “PROGRESSIVE” only if you
have made video connection C (page 18)
and wish to view progressive video
signals.
Hookups
Enjoying the surround sound
effects
Dolby Digital signal you wish to
send to your amplifier (receiver).
14Press X/x to select whether or
not you wish to send a DTS signal
to your amplifier (receiver).
Choose the item that matches the audio
connection you selected on pages 22 to
24 ( B through D ).
B-2
C-2
• OFF (page 69)
D
• ON (only if the amplifier (receiver) has
a DTS decoder) (page 69)
26
27
4 Press A on the player, and place a
set to “OFF” in the Setup Display (page 69),
and may affect your ears or cause your
speakers to be damaged.
disc on the disc tray.
Playing Discs
Notes on playing DVD VIDEOs with a DTS
sound track
Playing Discs
Refer to the operating instructions supplied
with your disc.
Power
indicator
Z
5 Press H.
The disc tray closes, and the player starts
playback (continuous play). Adjust the
volume on the TV or the amplifier
(receiver).
Depending on the disc, a menu may
appear on the TV screen. For DVD
VIDEOs, see page 32. For VIDEO CDs,
see page 33.
A
H
[/1
With the playback side facing down
Operation
Replay the previous
scene (DVD VIDEO
only)
Press REPLAY
z Hint
The Replay function is useful when you want to
review a scene or dialog that you missed.
Note
You may not be able to use the Replay function with
some scenes.
Playing Discs
Depending on the DVD or VIDEO CD, some
operations may be different or restricted.
• DTS audio signals are output only through
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or
OPTICAL) jack.
• When you play a DVD VIDEO with DTS
sound tracks, set “DTS” to “ON” in
“AUDIO SETUP” (page 69).
• If you connect the player to audio
equipment without a DTS decoder, do not
set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP”
(page 69). A loud noise may come out from
the speakers, affecting your ears or causing
the speakers to be damaged.
To
Locking the disc tray (Child
Lock)
You can lock the disc tray to prevent children
from opening it.
Additional operations
[/1
Z
[/1
To turn off the player
Press [/1. The player enters standby mode.
AUDIO
H
z Hint
You can have the player turn off automatically
whenever you leave it in stop mode for more than
30 minutes. To turn on this function, set “AUTO
POWER OFF” in “CUSTOM SETUP” to “ON”
(page 67).
./>
REPLAY
X
H
x
Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD
1 Turn on your TV.
2 Press [/1.
The player turns on and the power
indicator lights up in green.
3 Switch the input selector on your
TV so that the signal from the
player appears on the TV screen.
◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)
Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and
select the appropriate channel so that you
can hear sound from the player.
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs,
excessive noise will be heard from the
analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible
damage to the audio system, the consumer
should take proper precautions when the
analog stereo jacks of the player are
connected to an amplification system. To
enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an
external 5.1-channel decoder system must
be connected to the digital jack of the
player.
• Set the sound to “STEREO” using the
AUDIO button when you play DTS sound
tracks on a CD (page 48).
• Do not play DTS sound tracks without first
connecting the player to an audio
component having a built-in DTS decoder.
The player outputs the DTS signal via the
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
jack even if “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” is
To
Operation
Stop
Press x
Pause
Press X
Resume play after
pause
Press X or H
Go to the next chapter, Press >
track, or scene in
continuous play mode
Go back to the
Press .
previous chapter,
track, or scene in
continuous play mode
Stop play and remove Press Z
the disc
28
ENTER
O RETURN
When the player is in standby mode, press
O RETURN, ENTER, and then [/1 on the
remote.
The player turns on and “LOCKED” appears
on the front panel display.
The Z button on the player or the remote does
not work while the Child Lock is set.
To unlock the disc tray
When the player is in standby mode, press
O RETURN, ENTER, and then [/1 again.
Note
Even if you select “RESET” under “SETUP” in the
Control Menu (page 64), the disc tray remains
locked.
29
1-6
Searching for a
Particular Point on a
Disc (Search, Scan, Slow-motion
Play, Freeze Frame)
available. With each press the indication
changes as follows:
Resuming Playback from
the Point Where You
Stopped the Disc (Multi-disc
Playback direction
× 2B (DVD VIDEO/CD only) t FF1M t FF2M
Resume)
Opposite direction
The player stores the point where you stopped
the disc for up to 40 discs and resumes
playback the next time you insert the same
disc. When you store a resume playback point
for the 41st disc, the resume playback point
for the first disc is deleted.
The “× 2B”/“× 2b” playback speed is about
twice the normal speed. The “FF2M”/
“FR2m” playback speed is faster than
“FF1M”/“FR1m.”
Playing Discs
You can quickly locate a particular point on a
disc by monitoring the picture or playing back
slowly.
× 2b (DVD VIDEO only) t FR1m t FR2m
Notes
• “MULTI-DISC RESUME” in “CUSTOM
SETUP” must be set to “ON” (default) for this
function to work (page 68).
• The resume playback point for the current disc is
cleared when:
– you change the play mode.
– you change the settings on the Setup Display.
• This function may not work with some discs.
• Resume Play does not work during Shuffle Play
and Program Play.
Watching frame by frame (Slowmotion play)
c
/
m
C
M
H
Press
m or M
when the player is
in pause mode. To return to the normal speed,
press H.
Each time you press
m or M
during Slow-motion play, the playback speed
changes. Two speeds are available. With each
press the indication changes as follows:
H
x
Playback direction
SLOW2
Note
y SLOW1
Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not
be able to do some of the operations described.
Opposite direction (DVD only)
Locating a point quickly (Search)
The “SLOW2 y”/“SLOW2
” playback
speed is slower than “SLOW1 y”/“SLOW1
.”
During playback, keep pressing C to
locate a point in the playback direction or
keep pressing c to locate a point in the
opposite direction. When you find the point
you want, release the button to return to
normal playback speed.
Locating a point quickly by
playing a disc in fast forward or
fast reverse (Scan)
SLOW2
1 While playing a disc, press x to
y SLOW1
stop playback.
“RESUME” appears on the front panel
display.
2 Press H.
Playing one frame at a time
(Freeze Frame)
The player starts playback from the point
where you stopped the disc in Step 1.
When the player is in the pause mode, press
C to go to the next frame. Press c to
go to the preceding frame (DVD only). If you
hold the button down, you can view the
frames in succession. To return to normal
playback, press H.
z Hints
• To play from the beginning of the disc, press x
twice, then press H.
• For DVD-RWs in VR mode, CDs, and DATA
CDs, the player remembers the resume playback
point for the current disc unless the disc tray is
opened, the power cord is disconnected, or only
for DATA CDs, the player enters standby mode.
Press
m or M
while playing a
disc. When you find the point you want, press
H to return to normal speed. Each time you
press
m or M
during scan, the
playback speed changes. Three speeds are
30
31
Using the DVD’s Menu
• PLAY LIST: plays the titles created
from “ORIGINAL” for editing.
• ORIGINAL: plays the titles originally
recorded.
4 Press ENTER.
Some DVD-RW discs in VR (Video
Recording) mode have two types of titles for
playback: originally recorded titles
(ORIGINAL) and titles that can be created on
recordable DVD players for editing (PLAY
LIST). You can select the type of titles to be
played.
To turn off the Control Menu
Playing VIDEO CDs with
PBC Functions (PBC Playback)
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play
VIDEO CDs interactively by following the
menu on the TV screen.
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Menu is turned off.
Note
Number
buttons
Playing Discs
A DVD is divided into long sections of a
picture or a music feature called “titles.”
When you play a DVD which contains
several titles, you can select the title you want
using the TOP MENU button.
When you play DVDs that allow you to select
items such as the language for the subtitles
and the language for the sound, select these
items using the MENU button.
3 Press X/x to select the setting.
Selecting “ORIGINAL” or
“PLAY LIST” on a DVDRW Disc
Repeat Play and A-B Repeat Play do not work
across “ORIGINAL” and “PLAY LIST” titles.
Number
buttons
./>
H
X/x
x
ENTER
O
RETURN
C/X/x/c
TOP MENU
ENTER
X/x
ENTER
1 Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC
DISPLAY
MENU
1 Press TOP MENU or MENU.
The disc’s menu appears on the TV
screen.
The contents of the menu vary from disc
to disc.
2 Press C/X/x/c or the number
buttons to select the item you want
to play or change.
3 Press ENTER.
functions.
1 Press DISPLAY in stop mode.
The menu for your selection appears.
2 Select the item number you want
The Control Menu appears.
2 Press X/x to select
by pressing X/x or the number
buttons.
(ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST), then press
ENTER.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Follow the instructions in the
The options for “ORIGINAL/PLAY
LIST” appear.
12(27)
18(34)
PLAY LIST
PLAY LIST
ORIGINAL
STOP
DVD-RW
menu for interactive operations.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
disc, as the operating procedure may
differ depending on the VIDEO CD.
z Hint
The disc’s menu also appears when the TOP MENU
or MENU button on the player is pressed.
,continued
32
1-7
33
To return to the menu
Press O RETURN.
1( 30)
ROCK BEST HIT
KARAOKE
JAZZ
R&B
MY FAVORITE SONGS
CLASSICAL
SALSA OF CUBA
BOSSANOVA
You can play back DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/
CD-Rs/CD-RWs) recorded in MP3 (MPEG1
Audio Layer 3) format.
2
Z
Select an album using X/x and press
ENTER.
The list of tracks contained in the album
appears.
Note
Depending on the VIDEO CD, “Press ENTER” in
Step 3 may appear as “Press SELECT” in the
instructions supplied with the disc. In this case,
press H.
JAZZ
1(90)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
H
C/X/x/c
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
O RETURN
Select a track using X/x and press
ENTER.
The selected track starts playing.
When a track or album is being played, its
title is shaded.
1 Press Z and place a DATA CD on
To play a Multi Session CD
This player can play Multi Session CDs when
an MP3 audio track is located in the first
session. Any subsequent MP3 audio tracks,
recorded in the later sessions, can also be
played back.
When audio tracks and images in music CD
format or video CD format are recorded in the
first session, only the first session will be
played back.
Notes
SHE IS SPECIAL
ALL YOU NEED IS ...
SPICY LIFE
HAPPY HOUR
RIVER SIDE
5
TAKE TIME,TAKE TIME
ENTER
MENU
See the instructions of the CD-R/RW device
or recording software (not supplied) for
details on the recording format.
• If you put the extension “.MP3” to data not in
MP3 format, the player cannot recognize the data
properly and will generate a loud noise which
could damage your speaker system.
• The player cannot play audio tracks in MP3PRO
format.
The Playback order of MP3 audio tracks
The playback order of albums and tracks
recorded on a DATA CD is as follows.
◆Structure of disc contents
Tree 1
the disc tray.
To go to the next or previous page
2 Press H.
Playing Discs
z Hint
To play without using PBC, press ./> or the
number buttons while the player is stopped to select
a track, then press H or ENTER.
“Play without PBC” appears on the TV screen and
the player starts continuous play. You cannot play
still pictures such as a menu.
To return to PBC playback, press x twice then
press H.
Playing an MP3 Audio
Track
Tree 2
Tree 3
Tree 4
Tree 5
ROOT
Press c or C.
The disc tray closes, and the player starts
to play the first MP3 audio track in the
first album on the disc.
To return to the previous display
Press O RETURN.
To turn off the display
Press MENU.
Notes
Notes
• The player can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in
the following sampling frequencies: 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz.
• The playback order may be different from the
edited order. See “The Playback order of MP3
audio tracks” below for details.
• Only the letters in the alphabet and numbers can
be used for album or track names. Anything else
is displayed as “*.”
• ID3 tags cannot be displayed.
About MP3 audio tracks
Selecting an album and track
1
You can play MP3 audio tracks on CDROMs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs. However, the
discs must be recorded according to ISO9660
level 1, level 2, or Joliet format for the player
to recognize the tracks.
You can also play discs recorded in Multi
Session.
Press MENU.
The list of MP3 albums recorded on the
DATA CD appears.
album
track
,continued
34
z Hints
• If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front
of the track file names, the tracks will be played in
that order.
• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
playback, it is recommended that you create
albums of no more than two trees.
Notes
• Depending on the software you use to create the
DATA CD, the playback order may differ from
the illustration above.
• The playback order above may not be applicable
if there are more than a total of 999 albums and
tracks in the DATA CD.
• The player can recognize up to 499 albums (the
player will count just albums, including albums
that do not contain MP3 audio tracks). The player
will not play any albums beyond the first 499
albums. Of the first 499 albums, the player will
play no more than a combined total of 999 albums
and tracks.
1
Various Play Mode
Functions (Program Play,
Press DISPLAY twice (when playing a
CD, press once).
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE – –
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
The Control Menu appears.
2
Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, A-B Repeat
Press X/x to select
(PROGRAM), then press ENTER.
The options for “PROGRAM” appear.
Play)
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
OFF
OFF
SET
ON
You can set the following play modes:
• Program Play (page 36)
• Shuffle Play (page 38)
• Repeat Play (page 39)
• A-B Repeat Play (page 39)
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
3
The play mode is canceled when:
– you open the disc tray.
– the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1.
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE 0 2 – 0 3
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
Press X/x to select “SET t,” then
press ENTER.
T
––
01
02
03
04
05
“TRACK” is displayed when you play
a VIDEO CD or CD.
Creating your own program
(Program Play)
Selected title and chapter
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
You can play the contents of a disc in the
order you want by arranging the order of the
titles, chapters, or tracks on the disc to create
your own program. You can program up to 99
titles, chapters, and tracks.
T
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD
For example, select track “02.”
Press X/x or the number buttons to select
“02” under “T,” then press ENTER.
––
01
02
03
04
05
Selected track
4
Number
buttons
CLEAR
ALL CLEAR
1. TRACK
2. TRACK
3. TRACK
4. TRACK
5. TRACK
6. TRACK
7. TRACK
Press c.
The cursor moves to the title or track row
“T” (in this case, “01”).
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE – –
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
H
ENTER
T
C
––
01
02
03
04
05
ALL
01
02
03
04
05
06
DISPLAY
Chapters recorded on a disc
5
Select the title, chapter, or track you
want to program.
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO
For example, select chapter “03” of title
“02.”
Press X/x or the number buttons to select
“02” under “T,” then press ENTER.
0:15:30
T
PROGRAM
Titles or tracks
recorded on a disc
X/x/c
C
ALL
01
02
03
04
05
06
Next, press X/x or the number buttons to
select “03” under “C,” then press
ENTER.
PROGRAM
Note
T
––
01
02
03
04
05
Playing Discs
When you insert a DATA CD and press H,
the numbered tracks are played sequentially,
from 1 through 7. Any sub-albums/tracks
contained within a currently selected album
take priority over the next album in the same
tree. (Example: C contains D so 4 is played
before 5.)
When you press MENU and the list of MP3
albums appears (page 34), the albums are
arranged in the following order: A t B t
C t D t F t G. Albums that do not
contain tracks (such as album E) do not
appear in the list.
35
02
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
01
02
03
04
05
Total time of the programmed tracks
6
To program other titles, chapters, or
tracks, repeat Steps 4 to 5.
The programmed titles, chapters, and
tracks are displayed in the selected order.
7
Press H to start Program Play.
Program Play begins.
When the program ends, you can restart
the same program again by pressing H.
To return to normal play
Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3. To
play the same program again, select “ON” in
Step 3 and press ENTER.
,continued
36
1-8
37
1
To turn off the display
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display
is turned off.
Follow Steps 1 through 3 of “Creating
your own program (Program Play).”
2
Select the program number of the title,
chapter, or track you want to change or
cancel using X/x or the number buttons,
and press c.
3
Follow Step 5 for new programming. To
cancel a program, select “--” under “T,”
then press ENTER.
To cancel all the titles, chapters, or tracks
in the programmed order
1
Follow Steps 1 through 3 of “Creating
your own program (Program Play).”
2
3
Press X and select “ALL CLEAR.”
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
Playing in random order (Shuffle
Play)
You can have the player “shuffle” titles,
chapters, or tracks. Subsequent “shuffling”
may produce a different playing order.
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
To return to normal play
CLEAR
Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 2.
3
Press X/x to select the item to be
shuffled.
z Hints
• You can set Repeat Play while the player is
stopped. After selecting the “REPEAT” option,
press H. Repeat Play starts.
• You can also select “REPEAT” from the Control
Menu (page 12).
REPEAT
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO
• TITLE
• CHAPTER
H
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD
• TRACK
◆ When Program Play is activated
• ON: shuffles titles, chapters, or tracks
selected in Program Play.
4
1
Repeating a specific portion (AB Repeat Play)
Press REPEAT during playback.
The following display appears.
Press ENTER.
Shuffle Play starts.
DISC
You can play a specific portion of a title,
chapter or track repeatedly. (This function is
useful when you want to memorize lyrics, etc.)
To return to normal play
Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3.
2
To turn off the Control Menu
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Menu is turned off.
Press REPEAT repeatedly to select the
item to be repeated.
CLEAR
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO
• DISC: repeats all of the titles.
• TITLE: repeats the current title on a
disc.
• CHAPTER: repeats the current
chapter.
◆ When playing a DVD-RW
• DISC: repeats all the titles of the
selected type.
• TITLE: repeats the current title on a
disc.
• CHAPTER: repeats the current
chapter.
H
X/x
◆ When Program Play or Shuffle Play is
activated
• ON: repeats Program Play or Shuffle
Play.
OFF
OFF
TITLE
CHAPTER
z Hints
• You can set Shuffle Play while the player is
stopped. After selecting the “SHUFFLE” option,
press H. Shuffle Play starts.
• Up to 200 chapters in a disc can be played in
random order when “CHAPTER” is selected.
CLEAR
◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
• DISC: repeats all of the albums.
• ALBUM: repeats the current album.
• TRACK: repeats the current track.
You can play all of the titles or tracks on a
disc or a single title, chapter, or track
repeatedly.
You can use a combination of Shuffle or
Program Play modes.
The options for “SHUFFLE” appear.
Press ENTER.
z Hint
You can do Repeat Play or Shuffle Play of the
programmed titles, chapters, or tracks. During
Program Play, follow the Steps of “Repeat Play”
(page 39) or “Shuffle Play” (page 38).
Press X/x to select
(SHUFFLE), then press ENTER.
ENTER
DISPLAY
X/x
ENTER
DISPLAY
1
Press DISPLAY twice during playback
(when playing a CD, press once).
The Control Menu appears.
,continued
38
2
Press X/x to select
(A-B
REPEAT), then press ENTER.
The options for “A-B REPEAT”
appear.
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
OFF
SET
OFF
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:34:30
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
Searching for a Scene
Searching for a Title/
Chapter/Track/Index/
Scene (Search mode)
ON
CHAPTER TIME
A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55
B: 18 – 1 : 34 : 30
To return to normal play
Press X/x to select “SET t,” then
press ENTER.
The “A-B REPEAT” setting display
appears.
Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3.
You can search a DVD by title or chapter, and
you can search a VIDEO CD/CD by track,
index, or scene. As titles and tracks are
assigned unique numbers on the disc, you can
select the desired one by entering its number.
Or, you can search for a scene using the time
code.
To turn off the Control Menu
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Menu is turned off.
Notes
A-B REPEAT
Set point A with
4
ENTER .
During playback, when you find the
starting point (point A) of the portion to
be played repeatedly, press ENTER.
• When you set A-B Repeat Play, the settings for
Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, and Program Play are
canceled.
• A-B Repeat Play does not work for titles
containing still pictures on a DVD-RW in VR
mode.
• A-B Repeat Play does not work across multiple
titles on a DVD-RW in VR mode.
SEARCH
MODE
A-B REPEAT
.
1 Press SEARCH MODE.
CHAPTER TIME
A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55
5
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD
TRACK
INDEX
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD with PBC
Playback
SCENE
◆ When playing a CD
TRACK
INDEX
◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
ALBUM
TRACK
track, scene, time code, etc. you
want by pressing the number
buttons to select the digit.
ENTER
ENTER
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
TITLE
CHAPTER
TIME/TEXT
Select “TIME/TEXT” to search for a
starting point by inputting the time code.
3 Select the number of the title,
Number
buttons
CLEAR
The starting point (point A) is set.
Set point B with
39
Searching for a Scene
3
Playing Discs
1
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD
• DISC: repeats all of the tracks.
• TRACK: repeats the current track.
Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play)
The Control Menu appears.
2
To change or cancel a program
Press DISPLAY twice during playback
(when playing a CD, press once).
The following display appears.
“-- (**)” appears next to the icon (**
refers to a number).
The number in parentheses indicates the
total number of titles, tracks, indexes,
scenes, etc. of the disc.
When you reach the ending point
(point B), press ENTER again.
The set points are displayed and the
player starts repeating this specific
portion.
“A-B” appears on the front panel display
during A-B Repeat Play.
– –(10)
2 Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly
to select the search method.
For example, to find the scene at 2 hours,
10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the
beginning, select “TIME/TEXT” in Step
2 and enter “2:10:20.”
If you make a mistake
Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR,
then select another number.
4 Press ENTER.
The player starts playback from the
selected number.
To turn off the display
Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly until the
display is turned off.
z Hints
• You can display the first scene of titles, chapters
or tracks recorded on the disc on a screen divided
into 9 sections. You can start playback directly by
selecting one of the scenes. For details, see page
42.
• You can also select “TITLE,” “CHAPTER,”
“TRACK,” “INDEX,” “SCENE,” “TIME/
TEXT,” or “ALBUM” from the Control Menu
(page 12).
,continued
40
1-9
41
Note
You cannot search for a still picture on a DVD-RW
in VR mode.
3 Press ENTER.
Searching by Scene
(PICTURE NAVIGATION)
Dividing a scene into 9 sections
(STROBE PLAYBACK)
To return to normal play
You can display 9 consecutive moving
pictures on the screen.
Press O RETURN.
You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens
and find the desired scene quickly.
z Hint
You can also select “PICTURE NAVIGATION”
from the Control Menu (page 12).
Notes
PICTURE
NAVI
Scanning the title, chapter, or
track (TITLE VIEWER, CHAPTER
VIEWER, TRACK VIEWER)
X
ENTER
C/X/x/c
O RETURN
You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens
and display the first scene of titles, chapters,
or tracks.
You can also play back from the selected title,
chapter, or track. After performing Step 3 of
“Searching by Scene (PICTURE
NAVIGATION)” above, select the scene
using C/X/x/c and press ENTER.
1 Press PICTURE NAVI during
playback.
The following display appears.
TITLE VIEWER
Displaying different angles
simultaneously (ANGLE VIEWER)
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene
are recorded on the DVD VIDEO, you can
display all of the angles recorded on the disc
on the screen divided into 9 sections.
Searching for a Scene
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to
select all functions.
• The sound is muted when using this function.
When you press X after performing Step 3 of
“Searching by Scene (PICTURE
NAVIGATION)” above, the moving pictures
pause.
You can also play back from the selected
angle. After performing Step 3 of “Searching
by Scene (PICTURE NAVIGATION)”
above, select the angle using C/X/x/c and
press ENTER.
z Hint
If there are more than 9 titles, chapters, or tracks, V
is displayed at the bottom right.
To display the additional titles, chapters, or tracks,
select the bottom right scene (the position 9) and
press x. To return to the previous scene, select the
top left scene (the position 1) and press X.
ENTER
2 Press PICTURE NAVI repeatedly to
select the item.
Refer to the explanations given for each
item in the following sections.
• TITLE VIEWER (for DVD VIDEO
only)
• CHAPTER VIEWER (for DVD
VIDEO only)
• TRACK VIEWER (for VIDEO CD
only)
• STROBE PLAYBACK
• ANGLE VIEWER (for DVD VIDEO
only)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
42
43
Viewing Information About the
Disc
Checking the Playing
Time and Remaining
Time
Checking the information on the
front panel display
You can view the time information and text
displayed on the TV screen also on the front
panel display. The information on the front
panel display changes as follows when you
change the time information on your TV
screen.
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC
functions)
• **:**
Playing time of the current scene
Title playing time and the current title
and chapter number
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD (without
PBC functions) or CD
• T **:**
Playing time of the current track
• T–**:**
Remaining time of the current track
• D **:**
Playing time of the current disc
• D –**:**
Remaining time of the current disc
TITLE
The following display appears.
T 1:01:57
PLAY
change the time information.
The display and the kinds of time that you
can change depend on the disc you are
playing.
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
Remaining time of the current track
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
MIN
SEC
Playing time of the disc
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
SEC
Remaining time of the disc
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
Text
SEC
Remaining time of the current
chapter
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
TITLE
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
Text
Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly in Step 2 to
display text recorded on the DVD VIDEO/
CD/DATA CD.
The DVD/CD text appears only when text is
recorded in the disc. You cannot change the
text. If the disc does not contain text, “NO
TEXT” appears.
TITLE
SEC
Playing time and number of the
current chapter
z Hints
• When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions,
the scene number and the playing time are
displayed.
• Long text that does not fit in a single line will
scroll across the front panel display.
• You can also check the time information and text
using the Control Menu (page 12).
Notes
When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
Playing time and number of the current
track and album
TITLE
Time
information
2 Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to
TITLE
Remaining time of the current title
To check the DVD/CD text or track and
album names (MP3 audio)
1 Press TIME/TEXT during playback.
Track playing time and the current
track and index number
When playing a DVD VIDEO or DVD-RW
◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
• ****:**
Playing time of the current track
TIME/TEXT
When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC
functions) or CD
Viewing Information About the Disc
You can check the playing time and
remaining time of the current title, chapter, or
track. Also, you can check the DVD/CD text
or track name (MP3 audio) recorded on the
disc.
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO or DVDRW
• T **:**:**
Playing time of the current title
• T–**:**:**
Remaining time of the current title
• C **:**:**
Playing time of the current chapter
• C–**:**:**
Remaining time of the current chapter
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
• Depending on the type of disc being played, the
DVD/CD text or track name may not be
displayed.
• The player can only display the first level of the
DVD/CD text, such as the disc name or title.
• Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be
displayed correctly.
Track name
TITLE
BRAHMS SYMPHONY
TRACK
CHAP
For DATA CDs, the track and album names
of the MP3 audio track appears (page 47).
44
45
1-10
To turn off the Control Menu
Checking the Play
Information
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Menu is turned off.
You can check information such as the bit
rate or the disc layer that is being played.
By pressing DISPLAY repeatedly, you can
display either “BIT RATE” or “LAYER,”
whichever was selected in “ADVANCED.”
Checking the play information of
a DATA CD
By pressing TIME/TEXT while playing MP3
audio tracks on a DATA CD, you can display
the audio bit rate (the amount of data per
second of the current audio).
Displays of each item
Bit rate
◆BIT RATE
BIT RATE
0
X/x
ENTER
DISPLAY
Checking the play information of
a DVD (ADVANCED)
1
Audio
Mbps
Video
10
Bit rate refers to the amount of video/audio
data per second in a disc. While playing a
disc, an approximate bit rate of the playback
picture is displayed as Mbps (Mega bit per
second) and the audio as kbps (kilo bit per
second). The higher the bit rate, the larger the
amount of data. However, this does not
always mean that you can get higher quality
pictures or sounds.
17:30
128k
PLAY
Viewing Information About the Disc
TIME/TEXT
5
384kbps
T
JAZZ
RIVER SIDE
Album name
Track name
◆LAYER
Appears when the DVD
has dual layers
Press DISPLAY during playback.
The Control Menu is displayed.
2
Press X/x to select
(ADVANCED), then press ENTER.
The options for “ADVANCED” appear.
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
BIT RATE
OFF
BIT RATE
LAYER
3
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
Indicates the approximate point where the
disc is playing.
If it is a dual-layer DVD, the player indicates
which layer is being read (“Layer 0” or
“Layer 1”).
For details on the layers, see page 73 (DVD
VIDEO).
BIT RATE
384 kbps
0
5
10
Mbps
Press X/x to select items.
For each item, please refer to “Displays
of each item.”
• BIT RATE: displays the bit rate.
• LAYER: displays the layer and the
pick-up point.
4
Press ENTER.
To close the ADVANCED window
Select “OFF” in Step 3.
46
47
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select
Sound Adjustments
Changing the Sound
AUDIO
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
1: ENGLISH
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, the
choice of language varies.
When 4 digits are displayed, they
indicate a language code. Refer to
“Language Code List” on page 76 to see
which language the code represents.
When the same language is displayed two
or more times, the DVD VIDEO is
recorded in multiple audio formats.
PROGRAM FORMAT
DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1
L
DISPLAY
1 Press AUDIO during playback.
The following display appears.
1:ENGLISH
C
R
LFE
LS
RS
Currently playing program format**
*“PCM,” “DTS,” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” is
displayed.
In the case of “DOLBY DIGITAL,” the
channels in the playing track are displayed
by numbers as follows:
◆ When playing a DVD-RW
The types of sound tracks recorded on a
disc are displayed. The default setting is
underlined.
Example:
• 1: MAIN (main sound)
• 1: SUB (sub sound)
• 1: MAIN+SUB (main and sub sound)
For Dolby Digital 5.1 ch:
Rear component 2
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD, CD, or
DATA CD (MP3 audio)
The default setting is underlined.
• STEREO: The standard stereo sound
• 1/L: The sound of the left channel
(monaural)
• 2/R: The sound of the right channel
(monaural)
TV Virtual Surround
Settings (TVS)
When you connect a stereo TV or 2 front
speakers, TVS (TV Virtual Surround) lets
you enjoy surround sound effects by using
sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers
from the sound of the front speakers (L: left,
R: right) without using actual rear speakers.
TVS was developed by Sony to produce
surround sound for home use using just a
stereo TV.
This function is designed to work with the
LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks.
Note that if you select one of the TVS
settings, the player does not output Dolby
Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT
(OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack. (when you
set “DOLBY DIGITAL” in “AUDIO
SETUP” to “D-PCM”) (page 69)
DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1
Front component 2+
Center component 1
LFE (Low Frequency
Effect) component 1
**The letters in the program format display
mean the following sound component:
L: Front (left)
R: Front (right)
C: Center
LS: Rear (left)
RS: Rear (right)
S:
Rear (monaural): The rear
component of the Dolby
Surround processed signal and
the Dolby Digital signal
LFE: Low Frequency Effect signal
z Hint
You can also select “AUDIO” from the Control
Menu (page 12).
Displaying the audio information
of the disc
X/x
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
Press DISPLAY during playback to display
the Control Menu. Select “AUDIO” using X/
x. The channels being played are displayed
on the screen.
For example, in Dolby Digital format,
multiple signals ranging from monaural to 5.1
channel signals can be recorded on a DVD
VIDEO. Depending on the DVD VIDEO, the
number of the recorded channels may differ.
Sound Adjustments
When playing a DVD VIDEO recorded in
multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital,
or DTS), you can change the audio format. If
the DVD VIDEO is recorded with
multilingual tracks, you can also change the
language.
With CDs, DATA CDs, or VIDEO CDs, you
can select the sound from the right or left
channel and listen to the sound of the selected
channel through both the right and left
speakers. For example, when playing a disc
containing a song with the vocals on the right
channel and the instruments on the left
channel, you can hear the instruments from
both speakers by selecting the left channel.
Current audio format*
the desired audio signal.
z Hint
For Dolby Digital and DTS, “LFE” is always
enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal
component being output.
SUR
1 Press SUR during playback.
The following display appears.
TVS DYNAMIC
Note
If “DTS” is set to “OFF” in “AUDIO SETUP”
(page 69) the DTS track selection option will not
appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS
tracks.
,continued
48
1-11
49
2 Press SUR repeatedly to select
one of the TVS sounds.
Refer to the following explanations given
for each item.
• TVS DYNAMIC
• TVS WIDE
• TVS NIGHT
• TVS STANDARD
◆TVS STANDARD
Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound
of the front speakers (L, R) without using
actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are
reproduced as shown in the illustration
below. Use this setting when you want to use
TVS with 2 separate speakers.
L
Changing the Angles
R
Select “OFF” in Step 2.
◆TVS WIDE
Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound
of the front speakers (L, R) without using
actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are
reproduced as shown in the illustration
below.
This mode is effective when the distance
between the front L and R speakers is short,
such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.
TV
SUBTITLE
L: Front speaker (left)
R: Front speaker (right)
: Virtual speaker
ANGLE
z Hints
• You can select “TVS” by pressing the
SURROUND button on the player.
• You can also select “TVS” from the Control
Menu (page 12).
1 Press SUBTITLE during playback.
The following display appears.
1 Press ANGLE during playback.
1:ENGLISH
The number of the angle appears on the
display.
Notes
• When the playing signal does not contain a signal
for the rear speakers, the surround effects cannot
be heard.
• When you select one of the TVS modes, turn off
the surround setting of the connected TV or
amplifier (receiver).
• Make sure that your listening position is between
and at an equal distance from your speakers, and
that the speakers are located in similar
surroundings.
• “TVS NIGHT” only works with Dolby Digital
discs. However, not all discs will respond to the
“TVS NIGHT” function in the same way.
• If you use the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or
COAXIAL) jack and set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to
“DOLBY DIGITAL” or “DTS” to “ON” in
“AUDIO SETUP,” sound will come from your
speakers but it will not have the TVS effect.
2
2 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to
select the setting.
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly to select
the angle number.
The scene changes to the selected angle.
z Hints
• You can display all the angles recorded on the
disc on the same screen, and start playback
directly from the chosen angle. The angles are
displayed on a screen divided into 9 sections
(page 42).
• You can also select “ANGLE” from the Control
Menu (page 12).
◆TVS NIGHT
Large sounds, such as explosions, are
suppressed, but the quieter sounds are
unaffected. This feature is useful when you
want to hear the dialog and enjoy the
surround sound effects of “TVS WIDE” at
low volume.
Note
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, you may not be
able to change the angles even if multi-angles are
recorded on the DVD VIDEO.
◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO
Select the language.
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, the
choice of language varies.
When 4 digits are displayed, they
indicate a language code. Refer to
“Language Code List” on page 76 to see
which language the code represents.
◆ When playing a DVD-RW
Select “ON.”
To turn off the subtitles
Select “OFF” in Step 2.
z Hint
You can also select “SUBTITLE” from the Control
Menu (page 12).
,continued
50
Note
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, you may not be
able to change the subtitles even if multilingual
subtitles are recorded on it. You also may not be
able to turn them off.
Enjoying Movies
TV
If subtitles are recorded on the discs, you can
change the subtitles or turn them on and off
whenever you want while playing a DVD.
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene
are recorded on the DVD VIDEO, “ANGLE”
appears in the front panel display. This means
that you can change the viewing angle.
To cancel the setting
◆TVS DYNAMIC
Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound
of the front speakers (L, R) without using
actual rear speakers (shown below).
This mode is effective when the distance
between the front L and R speakers is short,
such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.
Displaying the Subtitles
Enjoying Movies
4 Press ENTER.
Adjusting the Picture
Quality (BNR)
The disc plays with the setting you
selected.
51
Adjusting the Playback
Picture (CUSTOM PICTURE MODE)
To cancel the “BNR” setting
Select “OFF” in Step 3.
The Block Noise Reduction (BNR) function
adjusts the picture quality by reducing the
“block noise” or mosaic like patterns that
appear on your TV screen.
To turn off the Control Menu
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Menu is turned off.
Notes
You can adjust the video signal of the DVD or
VIDEO CD from the player to obtain the
picture quality you want. Choose the setting
that best suits the program you are watching.
When you select “MEMORY,” you can make
further adjustments to each element of the
picture (color, brightness, etc.).
• If the outlines of the images on your screen should
become blurred, set “BNR” to “OFF.”
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
the “BNR” effect may be hard to discern.
PICTURE
MODE
ENTER
DISPLAY
ENTER
C/X/x/c
1 Press DISPLAY twice during
Enjoying Movies
X/x
O RETURN
playback.
1 Press PICTURE MODE during
The Control Menu appears.
2 Press X/x to select
playback.
(BNR),
The following display appears.
then press ENTER.
The options for “BNR” appear.
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
DYNAMIC 1
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
2 Press PICTURE MODE repeatedly
to select the setting you want.
The default setting is underlined.
• STANDARD: displays a standard
picture.
• DYNAMIC 1: produces a bold
dynamic picture by increasing the
picture contrast and the color intensity.
• DYNAMIC 2: produces a more
dynamic picture than DYNAMIC 1 by
further increasing the picture contrast
and the color intensity.
3 Press X/x to select a level.
• 1: reduces the “block noise.”
• 2: reduces the “block noise” more than
1.
• 3: reduces the “block noise” more than
2.
,continued
52
1-12
53
• CINEMA 1: enhances details in dark
areas by increasing the black level.
• CINEMA 2: White colors become
brighter and black colors become
richer, and the color contrast is
increased.
• MEMORY: adjusts the picture in
greater detail.
z Hints
• When you watch a movie, “CINEMA 1” or
“CINEMA 2” is recommended.
• The picture can be adjusted by pressing the
PICTURE MODE button on the player as well.
• You can also select “CUSTOM PICTURE
MODE” from the Control Menu (page 12).
Adjusting the picture items in
“MEMORY”
1
C
Enhancing the Playback
Picture (DIGITAL VIDEO
01:32:55
PICTURE
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
HUE
RETURN
+1
–3
+3
–1
•
•
•
•
ENHANCER)
RESET
The Digital Video Enhancer (DVE) function
makes the picture appear clear and crisp by
enhancing the outlines of images on your TV
screen. Also, this function can soften the
images on the screen.
To turn off the display
Press O RETURN , or select “RETURN” in
Step 3 and press ENTER.
1: enhances the outline.
2: enhances the outline more than 1.
3: enhances the outline more than 2.
SOFT: softens the image (DVD
VIDEO/DVD-RW only).
4 Press ENTER.
The disc plays with the setting you
selected.
To cancel the “DIGITAL VIDEO
ENHANCER” setting
z Hints
• To reset the picture items to the default values,
press c after Step 3 to select “RESET” and press
ENTER.
• When “PLAYBACK MEMORY” in “CUSTOM
SETUP” is set to “ON” the player will save a
single setting for up to 40 individual discs. (This
does not apply to DVD-RWs in VR mode.)
• If you do not want to save the adjustment in Step
2, you can go to the next picture item by pressing
X/x without saving.
Select “OFF” in Step 3.
To turn off the Control Menu
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Menu is turned off.
Note
X/x
ENTER
DISPLAY
Press PICTURE MODE repeatedly to
select “MEMORY” and press ENTER.
1 Press DISPLAY twice during
The “PICTURE”
adjustment bar appears.
8(3 )
C
3 Press X/x to select a level.
Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
noise found in the disc may become more apparent.
If this happens, it is recommended that you use the
BNR function (page 52) with the DVE function. If
the condition still does not improve, reduce the
Digital Video Enhancer level, or select “SOFT”
(DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only) in Step 3 above.
Enjoying Movies
You can adjust each element of the picture
individually.
• PICTURE: changes the contrast
• BRIGHTNESS: changes the overall
brightness
• COLOR: makes the colors deeper or lighter
• HUE: changes the color balance
The Custom Picture Mode display
appears. You can check each adjustment.
playback.
01:32:55
The Control Menu appears.
2 Press X/x to select
PICTURE
2
Select :
(DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER), then
press ENTER.
0
ENTER
Cancel : RETURN
The options for “DIGITAL VIDEO
ENHANCER” appear.
Press C/c to adjust the picture
contrast, then press ENTER.
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
The adjustment is saved, and
“BRIGHTNESS” adjustment bar
appears.
3
PLAY
DVD VIDEO
OFF
1
2
3
SOFT
OFF
Repeat Step 2 to adjust
“BRIGHTNESS,” “COLOR,” and
“HUE.”
54
55
3
Using Various Additional
Functions
Press X/x to select
(PARENTAL CONTROL), then press
ENTER.
To turn off the Custom Parental Control
function
The options for “PARENTAL
CONTROL” appear.
Locking Discs (CUSTOM
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL
STOP
DVD VIDEO
CONTROL)
You can set two kinds of playback restrictions
for the desired disc.
• Custom Parental Control
You can set playback restrictions so that the
player will not play inappropriate discs.
• Parental Control
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be
limited according to a predetermined level
such as the age of the users. Scenes may be
blocked or replaced with different scenes.
The same password is used for both Parental
Control and Custom Parental Control.
ON
PLAYER
PASSWORD
OFF
4
1
Press X/x to select “ON t,” then
press ENTER.
Custom parental control is already
set. To play, enter your password
and press ENTER .
Enter a 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
The display for confirming the password
appears.
1
Parental Control (limited
playback)
Enter password, then press
ENTER
.
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be
limited according to a predetermined level
such as the age of the users. The
“PARENTAL CONTROL” function allows
you to set a playback limitation level.
ENTER
DISPLAY
5
Press DISPLAY while the player is in
stop mode.
The Control Menu appears.
2
Press X/x to select
(PARENTAL CONTROL), then press
ENTER.
The options for “PARENTAL
CONTROL” appear.
Enter your 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
The player is ready for playback.
z Hint
If you forget your password, enter the 6-digit
number “199703” using the number buttons when
the “CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL” display
asks you for your password, then press ENTER.
The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit
password.
ENTER
DISPLAY
12(27)
18(34)
T
1:32:55
STOP
DVD VIDEO
ON
PLAYER
PASSWORD
OFF
3
Using Various Additional Functions
2
x
Press DISPLAY while the player is in
stop mode.
Insert the disc for which Custom Parental
Control is set.
The “CUSTOM PARENTAL
CONTROL” display appears.
H
X/x
CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL
PARENTAL CONTROL
2
Enter your 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
To play a disc for which Custom Parental
Control is set
◆ When you have already registered a
password
The display for entering the password
appears.
If the disc is playing, press x to stop
playback.
3
Number
buttons
Enter a new 4-digit password, then
press ENTER .
Number
buttons
Insert the disc you want to lock.
Press X/x to select “OFF t,” then press
ENTER.
PARENTAL CONTROL
You can set the same Custom Parental
Control password for up to 40 discs. When
you set the 41st-disc, the first disc is canceled.
1
Follow Steps 1 through 3 of “Custom
Parental Control.”
2
◆ If you have not entered a password
The display for registering a new
password appears.
Custom Parental Control
X/x
1
Press X/x to select “PLAYER t,”
then press ENTER.
◆ If you have not entered a password
The display for registering a new
password appears.
PARENTAL CONTROL
Enter a new 4-digit password, then
press ENTER .
Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password
using the number buttons, then press
ENTER.
“Custom parental control is set.” appears
and then the screen returns to the Control
Menu.
Enter a 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
The display for confirming the password
appears.
The Control Menu appears.
,continued
56
1-13
57
◆ When you have already registered a
password
The display for entering the password
appears.
ENTER
Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password
using the number buttons, then press
ENTER.
2047
Parental Control setting is complete.
Belgium
2057
Brazil
2070
Canada
2079
Chile
2090
PG13
USA
Set “LEVEL” to “OFF” in Step 8.
Press X/x to select “STANDARD,”
then press ENTER.
The selection items for “STANDARD”
are displayed.
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
6
OFF
USA
USA
OTHERS
Press X/x to select a geographic area
as the playback limitation level, then
press ENTER.
The area is selected.
When you select “OTHERS t,” select
and enter a standard code in the table on
page 59 using the number buttons.
7
Press X/x to select “LEVEL,” then
press ENTER.
The selection items for “LEVEL” are
displayed.
To play a disc for which Parental Control is
set
1
Insert the disc and press H.
The display for entering your password
appears.
2
Enter your 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
The player starts playback.
Press DISPLAY while the player is in
stop mode.
z Hint
If you forget your password, remove the disc and
repeat Steps 1 to 3 of “Parental Control (limited
playback).” When you are asked to enter your
password, enter “199703” using the number
buttons, then press ENTER. The display will ask
you to enter a new 4-digit password. After you enter
a new 4-digit password, replace the disc in the
player and press H. When the display for entering
your password appears, enter your new password.
Notes
China
2092
Denmark
2115
Finland
2165
France
2174
Germany
2109
India
2248
Indonesia
2238
2
Press X/x to select
(PARENTAL CONTROL), then press
ENTER.
The options for “PARENTAL
CONTROL” appear.
3
Press X/x to select “PASSWORD
t,” then press ENTER.
The display for entering the password
appears.
4
5
6
Enter your 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
Enter a new 4-digit password using the
number buttons, then press ENTER.
To confirm your password, re-enter it
using the number buttons, then press
ENTER.
Italy
2254
Japan
2276
Korea
2304
Malaysia
2363
Mexico
2362
Press C before you press ENTER and input
the correct number.
Netherlands
2376
If you make a mistake
New Zealand
2390
Press O RETURN.
Norway
2379
Pakistan
2427
Philippines
2424
Portugal
2436
Russia
2489
Singapore
2501
Spain
2149
Sweden
2499
Switzerland
2086
Thailand
2528
United Kingdom
2184
If you make a mistake entering your
password
Using Various Additional Functions
To turn off the Parental Control function
5
2044
2046
The lower the value, the stricter the
limitation.
OFF
USA
Argentina
Austria
The display for setting the playback
limitation level appears.
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
Code number
Australia
4:
1
The Control Menu appears.
Standard
Select the level you want using X/x,
then press ENTER.
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
Changing the password
Area Code
OFF
NC17
R
.
8
4
OFF
8:
7:
6:
5:
PARENTAL CONTROL
Enter password, then press
the disc. In this case, enter your password, then
change the level. If the Resume Play mode is
canceled, the level returns to the original level.
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
To turn off the display
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display
is turned off.
• When you play discs which do not have the
Parental Control function, playback cannot be
limited on this player.
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to
change the parental control level while playing
58
59
To turn off the Sound Feedback function
Operation Sound Effects
(Sound Feedback)
Controlling Your TV or AV
Amplifier (Receiver) with
the Supplied Remote
When there is no disc in the player, press and
hold X on the player for more than two
seconds. You will hear two beeps and the
Sound Feedback function is turned off.
The player beeps when the following
operations are performed.
The default setting of the Sound Feedback
function is set to off.
Operation
Operation sound
Power is turned on
One beep
Power is turned off
Two beeps
H is pressed
One beep
X is pressed
Two beeps
Playback is stopped
One long beep
By adjusting the remote signal, you can
control your TV with the supplied remote.
If you connect the player with an AV
amplifier (receiver), you can control the
volume with the supplied remote.
• Depending on the unit being connected, you may
not be able to control your TV or AV amplifier
(receiver) using some of the buttons below.
• If you enter a new code number, the code number
previously entered will be erased.
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the
code number you have set may be reset to the
default setting. Set the appropriate code number
again.
Setting Sound Feedback
Sony (default) 01
Panasonic
Akai
04
Philco
03,04
AOC
04
Philips
08,21
Centurion
12
Pioneer
16
Coronado
03
Portland
03
Curtis-Mathes 12
Proscan
10
Daytron
12
Quasar
06,18
Emerson
03,04,
14
Radio Shack 05,14
Fisher
11
TV/VIDEO
General
Electric
06,10
WIDE
MODE
Gold Star
03,04,
17
Hitachi
02,03
J.C.Penney
04,12
Controlling TVs with the remote
A
TV [/1
[/1
VOL +/–
Number
buttons
X
[/1
1
1
Press [/1 on the player or the remote.
The power indicator lights up in green.
When there is a disc in the player, press
A and remove the disc. Then press A
again to close the disc tray.
2
2
Hold down TV [/1, and enter your TV’s
manufacturer’s code (see “Code
numbers of controllable TVs” below)
using the number buttons.
JVC
09
KMC
03
Magnavox
03,08,
12
Marantz
04,13
Turns the TV on or off
MGA/
Mitsubishi
04,12,
13,17
NEC
04,12
Release TV [/1.
The remote is set to perform the following:
Press and hold X on the player for
more than two seconds.
TV [/1
VOL +/–*
Adjusts the volume of the TV
You will hear one beep and the Sound
Feedback function is turned on.
WIDE MODE
Switches to or from the wide
mode of a SONY’s wide TV
TV/VIDEO
If more than one code number is listed, try
entering them one at a time until you find the
one that works with your TV.
RCA
06,19
04,10
Sampo
12
Samsung
03,12,
20
Sanyo
11,14
Scott
12
Sears
07,10,
11
Sharp
03,05,
18
Sylvania
08,12
Teknika
03,08,
14
Toshiba
07
Wards
03,04,
12
Yorx
12
Zenith
15
Switches the TV’s input
source between the TV and
other input sources
,continued
60
1-14
Using Various Additional Functions
Power indicator
Code numbers of controllable TVs
Manufacturer Code
Manufacturer Code
number
number
Notes
Operation is not possible Three beeps
* Once you set a code number for your AV
amplifier (receiver), the VOL +/– buttons on the
remote control the AV amplifier’s volume only. If
you would rather control the TV’s volume, set the
code number to “90” (default) to control the TV’s
volume again (page 62).
61
3 Press X/x to select “CUSTOM,”
Controlling the volume of your
AV amplifier (receiver) with the
remote
The Setup Display appears.
Using the Setup Display
[/1
By using the Setup Display, you can make
various adjustments to items such as picture
and sound. You can also set a language for the
subtitles and the Setup Display, among other
things. For details on each Setup Display
item, see pages from 64 to 69.
VOL +/–
Number
buttons
then press ENTER.
Settings and Adjustments
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
4 Press X/x to select the setup item
from the displayed list:
“LANGUAGE SETUP,” “SCREEN
SETUP,” “CUSTOM SETUP,” or
“AUDIO SETUP.” Then press
ENTER.
Note
1
Hold down [/1, and enter your AV
amplifier (receiver)’s manufacturer’s
code (see the table below) using the
number buttons.
2
Release [/1.
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ORIGINAL
ENGLISH
Playback settings stored in the disc take priority
over the Setup Display settings and not all the
functions described may work.
The Setup item is selected.
Example: “SCREEN SETUP”
You can control the volume of the AV
amplifier (receiver) using VOL +/–.
Selected item
If more than one code number is listed, try
entering them one at a time until you find the
one that works with your AV amplifier
(receiver).
Setup items
X/x
ENTER
DISPLAY
Manufacturer
Code number
Sony
80, 88, 89, 91
Denon
84, 85, 86
Kenwood
92, 93
1 Press DISPLAY when the player is
5 Select an item using X/x, then
press ENTER.
The options for the selected item appear.
Example: “TV TYPE”
in stop mode.
The Control Menu appears.
Onkyo
81, 82, 83
Pioneer
99
Sansui
87
(SETUP), then press ENTER.
Technics
97, 98
The options for “SETUP” appear.
Yamaha
94, 95, 96
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
COMPONENT OUT:
MODE:
2 Press X/x to select
( 47 )
:
If you would rather control the volume of
your TV
:
STOP
DVD VIDEO
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 PAN SCAN
16:9
AUTO
Options
QUICK
CUSTOM
RESET
QUICK
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 above and enter the code
number 90 (default).
,continued
62
6 Select a setting using X/x, then
press ENTER.
The setting is selected and setup is
complete.
Example: “16:9”
Setting the Display or
Sound Track Language
Settings for the Display
(SCREEN SETUP)
(LANGUAGE SETUP)
Choose settings according to the TV to be
connected.
Selected setting
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
COMPONENT OUT:
MODE:
16:9
ON
JACKET PICTURE
INTERLACE
AUTO
“LANGUAGE SETUP” allows you to set
various languages for the on-screen display or
sound track.
Select “SCREEN SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 63).
The default settings are underlined.
Select “LANGUAGE SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 63).
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
4:3 LETTER BOX
SCREEN SAVER:
ON
BACKGROUND:
JACKET PICTURE
COMPONENT OUT:
INTERLACE
MODE:
AUTO
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ORIGINAL
ENGLISH
To turn off the display
Select “QUICK” in Step 3. Follow from Step
5 of the Quick Setup explanation to make
basic adjustments (page 25).
◆ TV TYPE
Switches the display language on the screen.
Note
Depending on the DVD, “4:3 LETTER BOX” may
be selected automatically instead of “4:3 PAN
SCAN” or vice versa.
◆ SCREEN SAVER
The screen saver image appears when you
leave the player in pause or stop mode for 15
minutes, or when you play back a CD or
DATA CD (MP3 audio) for more than 15
minutes. The screen saver will help prevent
your display device from becoming damaged
(ghosting). Press H to turn off the screen
saver.
ON
Turns on the screen saver.
OFF
Turns off the screen saver.
1
Select “RESET” in Step 3 and press
ENTER.
◆ AUDIO (DVD VIDEO only)
2
Select “YES” using X/x.
You can also quit the process and return
to the Control Menu by selecting “NO”
here.
Switches the language of the sound track.
When you select “ORIGINAL,” the language
given priority in the disc is selected.
◆ SUBTITLE (DVD VIDEO only)
Switches the language of the subtitle recorded
on the DVD VIDEO.
When you select “AUDIO FOLLOW,” the
language for the subtitles changes according to
the language you selected for the sound track.
Select this when you connect a
4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide
picture with bands on the upper
and lower portions of the
screen.
JACKET
PICTURE
The jacket picture (still picture)
appears, but only when the
jacket picture is already
recorded on the disc (CDEXTRA, etc.). If the disc does
not contain a jacket picture, the
“GRAPHICS” picture appears.
4:3
Select this when you connect a
PAN SCAN 4:3 screen TV. Automatically
displays the wide picture on the
entire screen and cuts off the
portions that do not fit.
GRAPHICS A preset picture stored in the
player appears.
BLUE
The background color is blue.
16:9
BLACK
The background color is black.
Select this when you connect a
wide-screen TV or a TV with a
wide mode function.
4:3 LETTER BOX
z Hint
If you select “OTHERS t” in “MENU,”
“SUBTITLE,” and “AUDIO,” select and enter a
language code from “Language Code List” on
page 76 using the number buttons.
Selects the background color or picture on the
TV screen in stop mode or while playing a
CD or DATA CD (MP3 audio).
◆ COMPONENT OUT
This will change the type of signal output
from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks
on the player. See page 73 for more
information about the different types.
INTERLACE
4:3 PAN SCAN
Settings and Adjustments
4:3
LETTER
BOX
◆ MENU (DVD VIDEO only)
You can select the desired language for the
disc’s menu.
Press ENTER.
All the settings explained on pages 64 to
69 return to the default settings. Do not
press [/1 while resetting the player as it
takes a few seconds to complete.
Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV
(4:3 standard or wide).
◆ OSD (On-Screen Display)
To reset all of the “SETUP” settings
3
63
◆ BACKGROUND
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display
is turned off.
To enter the Quick Setup mode
Settings and Adjustments
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
4:3 LETTER BOX
SCREEN SAVER:
ON
BACKGROUND:
JACKET PICTURE
COMPONENT OUT:
INTERLACE
AUTO
MODE:
Code numbers of controllable AV
amplifiers (receivers)
Select this when you are
connected to a standard
(interlace format) TV.
PROGRESSIVE Select this when you have
a TV that can accept
progressive signals.
Note
When you select a language in “MENU,”
“SUBTITLE,” or “AUDIO” that is not recorded on
the DVD VIDEO, one of the recorded languages
will be automatically selected.
16:9
,continued
64
1-15
65
z Hint
When the player outputs progressive signals, the
PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up.
Note
Custom Settings (CUSTOM
When you play video based software with
progressive signals, sections of some types of
images may appear unnatural due to the conversion
process when output through the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks. Images from the S VIDEO
OUT 1/2 and LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks are
unaffected as they are output in the interlace format.
Note
If you select “PROGRESSIVE” when you connect
the player to a TV that cannot accept the signal in
progressive format (480p), the image quality will
deteriorate. In this case, set the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT/SCAN SELECT switch on the back
panel of the player to INTERLACE. Then set
“COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE” when
you can see the TV screen correctly, and reset the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT/SCAN SELECT
switch to SELECTABLE.
SETUP)
Select “CUSTOM SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 63).
The default settings are underlined.
CUSTOM SETUP
AUTO POWER OFF:
AUTO PLAY:
DIMMER:
PAUSE MODE:
PLAYBACK MEMORY:
TRACK SELECTION:
MULTI-DISC RESUME:
You can fine-tune the Progressive (480p)
video signal output when you select
“PROGRESSIVE” in “COMPONENT
OUT” of the “SCREEN SETUP” display and
connect the player to the TV that is able to
accept the video signal in progressive format
(480p).
OFF
OFF
BRIGHT
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
◆ AUTO POWER OFF
Switches the Auto Power Off setting on or
off.
AUTO
The picture, including subjects
that move dynamically, is
output with no jitter. Normally
select this position.
FRAME
The picture, including subjects
that do not move dynamically,
is output in high resolution.
DVD software can be divided into two types:
film based software and video based
software. Video based software is derived
from TV, such as dramas and sit-coms, and
displays images at 30 frames/60 fields per
second. Film based software is derived from
film and displays images at 24 frames per
second. Some DVD software contains both
Video and Film.
In order for these images to appear natural on
your screen when output in PROGRESSIVE
mode (60 frames per second), the progressive
video signal needs to be converted to match
the type of DVD software that you are
watching.
OFF
Switches this function off.
ON
The player enters standby mode
when left in stop mode for more
than 30 minutes.
◆ AUTO PLAY
Switches the Auto Play setting on or off. This
function is useful when the player is
connected to a timer (not supplied).
OFF
Switches this function off.
ON
Automatically starts playback
when the player is turned on.
The player can store the “SUBTITLE” and
other settings of each disc for up to 40 discs
(Playback Memory).
Set this function “ON” or “OFF.”
ON
Stores the settings in memory
when you eject the disc.
OFF
Does not store the settings in
memory.
The following settings are stored in memory.
– ANGLE (page 51)*
– AUDIO (page 48)*
– BNR (page 52)
– DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 55)
– SUBTITLE (page 51)*
– CUSTOM PICTURE MODE (page 53)
* DVD VIDEO only
Note
The player can store the settings of up to 40 discs.
When you store the setting of disc number 41, the
first disc setting is canceled.
◆ TRACK SELECTION (DVD VIDEO only)
◆ DIMMER
BRIGHT
Makes the lighting bright.
DARK
Makes the lighting dark.
Gives the sound track which contains the
highest number of channels priority when you
play a DVD VIDEO on which multiple audio
formats (PCM, DTS, or Dolby Digital
format) are recorded.
OFF
Turns off the lighting.
OFF
No priority given.
AUTO
Priority given.
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.
This will automatically detect
if you are playing Film based
or Video based software and
convert the signal to the
appropriate conversion mode.
Normally select this position.
◆ PLAYBACK MEMORY (DVD VIDEO/
VIDEO CD only)
This will set the conversion
mode for Video based
software, regardless of the type
of software that you are
playing.
,continued
66
◆ DOWNMIX (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only)
Switches the method for mixing down to 2
channels when you play a DVD which has
rear sound elements (channels) or is recorded
in Dolby Digital format. For details on the
rear signal components, see “Displaying the
audio information of the disc” (page 48). This
function affects the output of the following
jacks:
– LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks
– DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to
“D-PCM” (page 69).
DOLBY
SURROUND
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component that conforms to
Dolby Surround (Pro Logic).
NORMAL
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component that does not
conform to Dolby Surround (Pro
Logic).
◆ DIGITAL OUT
OFF
Normally select this position. When
you select “ON,” see “Setting the
digital output signal” for further
settings.
If you connect a component that does not
conform to the selected audio signal, a loud
noise (or no sound) will come out from the
speakers, affecting your ears or causing the
speakers to be damaged.
◆ DOLBY DIGITAL (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
only)
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.
D-PCM
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Switches the method of outputting audio
signals when you connect a component such
as an amplifier (receiver) or MD deck with a
digital input jack.
For connection details, see page 20.
Select “DOLBY DIGITAL” and “DTS” after
setting “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON.”
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component lacking a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder. You can
select whether the signals
conform to Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) or not by making
adjustments to the
“DOWNMIX” item in
“AUDIO SETUP” (page 69).
◆ MULTI-DISC RESUME (DVD VIDEO/
VIDEO CD only)
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component with a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.
OFF
ON
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component lacking a built-in
DTS decoder.
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component with a built-in DTS
decoder.
ON
Stores the resume settings in
memory for up to 40 discs (The
settings remain in memory even
if you select OFF.)
OFF
Does not store the resume
settings in memory. Playback
restarts at the resume point only
for the current disc in the player.
67
Settings for the Sound
(AUDIO SETUP)
“AUDIO SETUP” allows you to set the sound
according to the playback and connection
conditions.
Select “AUDIO SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 63).
The default settings are underlined.
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
DTS:
OFF
Switches the Multi-disc Resume setting on or
off. Resume playback point can be stored in
memory for up to 40 different DVD VIDEO/
VIDEO CD discs (page 31).
◆ DTS (DVD VIDEO only)
The influence of the digital circuit
upon the analog circuit is minimal.
Setting the digital output signal
Notes
• When you set the item to “AUTO,” the language
may change. The “TRACK SELECTION” setting
has higher priority than the “AUDIO” settings in
“LANGUAGE SETUP” (page 64).
• If you set “DTS” to “OFF” (page 69), the DTS
sound track is not played even if you set “TRACK
SELECTION” to “AUTO.”
• If PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks
have the same number of channels, the player
selects PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound
tracks in this order.
Settings and Adjustments
Selects if audio signals are output via the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack.
ON
Settings and Adjustments
◆ MODE (Conversion Modes)
VIDEO
Selects the picture in pause mode.
Use this to set up playback related and other
settings.
When “PROGRESSIVE” is
selected in “COMPONENT OUT”
AUTO
◆ PAUSE MODE (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
only)
◆ AUDIO ATT (attenuation)
If the playback sound is distorted, set this
item to “ON.” The player reduces the audio
output level.
This function affects the output of the LINE
OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks.
OFF
Normally, select this position.
ON
Select this when the playback sound
from the speakers is distorted.
◆ AUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control)
(DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only)
Makes the sound clear when the volume is
turned down when playing a DVD that
conforms to “AUDIO DRC.” This affects the
output from the following jacks:
– LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks
– DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack only when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set
to “D-PCM” (page 69).
Note
If you select one of the TVS settings while playing
a DVD VIDEO, the player does not output Dolby
Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL
or COAXIAL) jack (when you set “DOLBY
DIGITAL” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “D-PCM”)
(page 69).
STANDARD Normally select this position.
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
DTS:
OFF
69
68
1-16
TV MODE
Makes the low sounds clear
even if you turn the volume
down.
WIDE
RANGE
Gives you the feeling of being
at a live performance.
Additional Information
Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following
difficulties while using the player, use this
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the
problem before requesting repairs. Should
any problem persist, consult your nearest
Sony dealer.
Power
The power is not turned on.
, Check that the AC power cord is connected
securely.
Picture
There is no picture/picture noise appears.
Operation
The disc does not start playing from the
beginning.
The remote does not function.
, Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, or
A-B Repeat Play has been selected (page
36).
, Resume play has taken effect (page 31).
Even though you set the aspect ratio in “TV
TYPE” of “SCREEN SETUP,” the picture
does not fill the screen.
, There are obstacles between the remote and
the player.
, The distance between the remote and the
player is too far.
, The remote is not pointed at the remote
sensor on the player.
, The batteries in the remote are weak.
, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your
DVD.
The disc does not play.
, The disc is turned over.
Insert the disc with the playback side facing
down on the disc tray.
, The disc is skewed.
, The player cannot play certain discs (page 6).
, The region code on the DVD does not match
the player.
, Moisture has condensed inside the player
(page 3).
, The player cannot play DVD-Rs, DVDRWs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs that are not
finalized (page 6).
Sound
There is no sound.
, Re-connect the connecting cord securely.
, The connecting cord is damaged.
, The player is connected to the wrong input
jack on the amplifier (receiver) (page 22,
23, 24).
, The amplifier (receiver) input is not
correctly set.
, The player is in pause mode or in Slowmotion Play mode.
, The player is in fast forward or fast reverse
mode.
, If the audio signal does not come through
the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or
COAXIAL) jack, check the audio settings
(page 69).
The MP3 audio track cannot be played
(page 35).
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,
noise will come from the LINE OUT L/R
(AUDIO) 1/2 jacks or DIGITAL OUT
(OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack (page 28).
, The DATA CD is not recorded in the MP3
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/
Level 2 or Joliet.
, The MP3 audio track does not have the
extension “.MP3.”
, The data is not formatted in MP3 even
though it has the extension “.MP3.”
, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.
, The player cannot play audio tracks in
MP3PRO format.
Sound distortion occurs.
The DVD-RW cannot be played.
Sound is noisy.
, Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to
“ON” (page 68).
, The player may not be able to play discs
containing recorded images with a copy
protection signal (CPRM protection) (page
6).
Images taken from digital broadcasts, etc.,
contain copy protection signals, such as
complete copy protection signals, single
copy signals, and restriction-free signals.
The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.
The sound volume may improve if you set
“AUDIO DRC” to “TV MODE” (page 68).
, Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to
“OFF” (page 68).
The title of the MP3 audio album or track
is not correctly displayed.
, The player can only display numbers and
alphabet. Other characters are displayed as
“*.”
The player starts playing the disc
automatically.
, The disc features an auto playback function.
, “AUTO PLAY” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is
set to “ON” (page 67).
Playback stops automatically.
, While playing discs with an auto pause
signal, the player stops playback at the auto
pause signal.
You cannot perform some functions such
as Stop, Search, Slow-motion Play,
Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program
Play.
, Depending on the disc, you may not be able
to do some of the operations above. See the
operating manual that comes with the disc.
The language for the sound track cannot
be changed.
, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the
direct selection button on the remote (page
32).
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the
DVD being played.
, The DVD prohibits the changing of the
language for the sound track.
The subtitle language cannot be changed
or turned off.
, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the
direct selection button on the remote (page
32).
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on
the DVD being played.
, The DVD prohibits the changing of the
subtitles.
The angles cannot be changed.
, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the
direct selection button on the remote (page
32).
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD
being played.
,continued
70
, The angle can only be changed when the
“ANGLE” indicator lights up on the front
panel display (page 9).
, The DVD prohibits changing of the angles.
Self-diagnosis Function
The player does not operate properly.
display)
, When static electricity, etc., causes the
player to operate abnormally, unplug the
player.
Nothing is displayed on the front panel
display.
, “DIMMER” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set
to “OFF.” Set “DIMMER” to “BRIGHT” or
“DARK” (page 67).
Glossary
(When letters/numbers appear in the
Chapter (page 9)
Sections of a picture or a music feature that
are smaller than titles. A title is composed of
several chapters. Depending on the disc, no
chapters may be recorded.
When the self-diagnosis function is activated
to prevent the player from malfunctioning, a
five-character service number (e.g., C 13 50)
with a combination of a letter and four digits
appears on the screen and the front panel
display. In this case, check the following
table.
Dolby Digital (page 24, 69)
Digital audio compression technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories. This
technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround
sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is
a discrete subwoofer channel in this format.
Dolby Digital provides the same 5.1 discrete
channels of high quality digital audio found in
Dolby Digital cinema audio systems. Good
channel separation is realized because all of
the channel data are recorded discretely and
little deterioration is realized because all
channel data processing is digital.
C:13:50
5 numbers or letters are displayed on the
screen and on the front panel display.
, The self-diagnosis function was activated.
(See the table on page 72.)
Cause and/or corrective
action
, Child Lock is set (page 29).
C 13
The disc tray does not open and “TRAY
LOCKED” appears on the front panel
display.
The disc is dirty.
, Clean the disc with a soft
cloth (page 7).
C 31
The disc is not inserted
correctly.
, Re-insert the disc
correctly.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
“Data error” appears on the TV screen
when playing a DATA CD.
, The MP3 audio track you want to play is
broken.
, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.
Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 23)
Audio signal processing technology that
Dolby Laboratories developed for surround
sound. When the input signal contains a
surround component, the Pro Logic process
outputs the front, center and rear signals. The
rear channel is monaural.
E XX
To prevent a malfunction, the
(xx is a number) player has performed the
self-diagnosis function.
, Contact your nearest
Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service
facility and give the 5character service number.
Example: E 61 10
DTS (page 24, 69)
Digital audio compression technology that
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This
technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround
sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is
a discrete subwoofer channel in this format.
DTS provides the same 5.1 discrete channels
of high quality digital audio.
Good channel separation is realized because
all of the channel data is recorded discretely
and little deterioration is realized because all
channel data processing is digital.
DVD VIDEO (page 6)
A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving
pictures even though its diameter is the same
as a CD.
The data capacity of a single-layer and singlesided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7
times that of a CD. The data capacity of a
double-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5
GB, a single-layer and double-sided DVD is
9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided
DVD is 17GB.
The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one
of the worldwide standards of digital
compression technology. The picture data is
compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its
original size. The DVD also uses a variable
rate coding technology that changes the data
to be allocated according to the status of the
picture. Audio information is recorded in a
multi-channel format, such as Dolby Digital,
allowing you to enjoy a more real audio
presence.
Furthermore, various advanced functions
such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and
Parental Control functions are provided with
the DVD.
DVD-RW (page 6)
A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable
disc with the same size as the DVD VIDEO.
The DVD-RW can be recorded in two
different modes: VR mode and Video mode.
VR (Video Recording) mode enables various
programming and editing functions, some of
which are limited in the case of Video mode.
Video mode complies with DVD VIDEO
format and can be played on other DVD
players while a DVD-RW recorded in VR
mode can only be played on DVD-RW
compliant players. The “DVD-RW”
appearing in this manual, and the on-screen
displays refer to DVD-RWs in VR mode.
Film based software, Video based
software (page 66)
DVDs can be classified as Film based or
Video based software. Film based DVDs
contain the same images (24 frames per
second) that are shown at movie theaters.
Video based DVDs, such as television
dramas or sit-coms, displays images at 30
frames (or 60 fields) per second.
Index (CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) (page
9)
A number that divides a track into sections to
easily locate the point you want on a CD or
VIDEO CD. Depending on the disc, no index
may be recorded.
,continued
72
1-17
71
Additional Information
The disc tray does not open and “LOCKED”
appears on the front panel display.
First three
characters of
the service
number
Additional Information
, Re-connect the connecting cord securely.
, The connecting cords are damaged.
, Check the connection to your TV (page 18)
and switch the input selector on your TV so
that the signal from the player appears on
the TV screen.
, The disc is dirty or flawed.
, If the picture output from your player goes
through your VCR to get to your TV or if
you are connected to a combination TV/
VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal
applied to some DVD programs could affect
picture quality. If you still experience
problems even when you connect your
player directly to your TV, please try
connecting your player to your TV’s S
VIDEO input (page 18).
, You have set “COMPONENT OUT” in
“SCREEN SETUP” to “PROGRESSIVE”
even though your TV cannot accept the
signal in progressive format. In this case, set
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT/SCAN
SELECT switch on the back panel of the
player to INTERLACE. Then set
“COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE”
after you can see the TV screen correctly,
and reset the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT/
SCAN SELECT switch to SELECTABLE.
, Even if your TV is compatible with
progressive format (480p) signals, the
image may be affected when you set
“COMPONENT OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE.” In this case, set
“COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE.”
73
Interlace format (page 65)
Language Code List
Interlace format shows every other line of an
image as a single “field” and is the standard
method for displaying images on television.
The even number field shows the even
numbered lines of an image, and the odd
numbered field shows the odd numbered lines
of an image.
For details, see pages 48, 51, 64.
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Progressive format (page 65)
Compared to the Interlace format that
alternately shows every other line of an image
(field) to create one frame, the Progressive
format shows the entire image at once as a
single frame. This means that while the
Interlace format can show 30 frames (60
fields) in one second, the Progressive format
can show 60 frames in one second. The
overall picture quality increases and still
images, text, and horizontal lines appear
sharper. This player is compatible with the
480 progressive format.
Code Language
Code Language
Code Language
Code Language
1027
1028
1032
1039
1044
1045
1051
1052
1053
1057
1059
1060
1061
1066
1183
1186
1194
1196
1203
1209
1217
1226
1229
1233
1235
1239
1245
1248
1253
1254
1257
1261
1269
1283
1287
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1305
1307
1311
1313
1326
1327
1332
1334
1347
1349
1350
1352
1353
1356
1357
1358
1363
1365
1369
1376
1379
1393
1403
1408
1417
1428
1435
1507
1508
1509
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1521
1525
1527
1528
1529
1531
1532
1534
1535
1538
1539
1540
1543
1557
1564
1572
1581
1587
1613
1632
1665
1684
1697
1067
1070
1079
1093
1097
1103
1105
1109
1130
1142
1144
1145
1149
1150
1151
1157
1165
1166
1171
1174
1181
Scene (page 9)
On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback
control) functions, the menu screens, moving
pictures and still pictures are divided into
sections called “scenes.”
Title (page 9)
The longest section of a picture or music
feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video
software, or the entire album in audio
software.
Track (page 9)
Sections of a picture or a music feature on a
CD or VIDEO CD (the length of a song).
74
76
1-18
1-18E
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali;
Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian;
Lettish
1345 Malagasy
1436
1463
1481
1482
1483
1489
1491
1495
1498
1501
1502
1503
1505
1506
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan)Oromo
Oriya
Punjabi
Polish
Pashto;
Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
RhaetoRomance
Kirundi
Romanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
SerboCroatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
1703 Not specified
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-3. FRONT PANEL BLOCK ASS'Y
REMOVAL
2-1. CASE REMOVAL
4 Case
3 Three screws
(B3)
1 Tapping screw
5 Two claws
1 Flexible board
(CN406)
4 Claw
2 Tapping screw
3 Two claws
2 Claw
6 Front panel block ass’y
2-2. TRAY COVER ASS'Y REMOVAL
4 Tray cover ass’y
2-4. MB-103 BOARD REMOVAL
3 Two claws
1 Two flexible flat cables
(FMO-001: CN201,
FMO-002: CN202)
2 Connector
(CN101)
5 Four screws
(B3)
1 Flexible flat cable
(FMM-035: CN402)
2 Pull the tray in the
direction of arrow B.
B
A
6 MB-103 board
1 Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the
unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam
in the direction of arrow A.
3 Connector
(CN102)
4 Connector
(CN601)
2-1
2-5. POWER BLOCK REMOVAL
2-7. MECHANISM DECK REMOVAL
1 Connector
(CN101)
2 Connector
(CN201)
3 Two screws
(B3)
2 Three screws
(B3)
4 Mechanism deck
3 Two screws
(B3)
1 Two flexible flat cables
(FMO-001: CN201,
FMO-002: CN202)
1 Flexible flat cable
(FMM-035: CN402)
4 Power block
3 Two claws
2-6. AV-63 BOARD REMOVAL
2-8. IF-92 BOARD REMOVAL
1 Two screws (B3)
1 Connector
(CN102)
2 FP support
4 Two screws
(B3)
9 Two screws (B3)
8 Connector
(CN102)
2 Connector
(CN601)
9 Screw (B3)
5 AV-63 board
3 Connector
(CN201)
0 IF-92 board
7 Tape
6 Connector
(CN102)
3 Six screws
(B3)
5 Tape
4 Connector
(CN102)
2-2
2-9. OPTICAL PICK-UP REMOVAL
2 Insulator
2 Insulator
1 Insulator screw
2 Insulator
1 Insulator
screw
1 Insulator screw
3 Optical pick-up
2-3
2-10. INTERNAL VIEWS
DC motor (loading)
not supplied
DC motor (loading)
not supplied
Optical pick-up
(KHM-270AAA)
A-6062-709-A
2-4
2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
Power Block
(HS12S1U)
( SWITCHING REGULATOR)
IF-92
(INTERFACE CONTROL)
AV-63
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
MS-81
(LOADING)
MB-103
(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)
2-5
2-5E
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-103 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-11to 4-25)
IC404
AV-63 BOARD
IC503
IC405
(SEE PAGE 4-29 to 4-31)
16M SDRAM
16M SDRAM
2
1
S VIDEO OUT
V, Y, C
BASE UNIT
IC303
KHM-270AAA/
SERVICE ASSY
16M DRAM
Y0 – 9
CBCR0 – 9
PO0 – 7
IC502
DVD0 – 7
OPTICAL DEVICE
VIDEO 2
IC504
VIDEO
ENCODER
I/P
CONVERTER
VIDEO 1
LINE OUT
VIDEO
BUFFER
IC403
IC201
DVD/CD
PD IC
RF
SIGO
Y, Cb, Cr
AV DECODER
SDI 0 – 7
DVD/CD RF AMP,
SERVO ERROR PROCESS
Y
Y, Cb, Cr
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
PB/CB
PR/CR
IC301
ARP,
SERVO DSP
CDDOUT, CDDATA,
CDBCK, CDLRCK
SPDIF, ACH12,
ACH34, ACH56,
BCK, LRCK
J201
COAXIAL
FOCUS
COIL
DIGITAL
OUT
SPDIF
IC204
OPTICAL
PARALLEL BUS
TRACKING
COIL
IC601
IC202
FOCUS/TRACKING
COIL DRIVE,
SPINDLE/SLED/
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE
INLIMIT
SENSOR
SPINDLE
MOTOR
SLED
MOTOR
M
IC201
AUDIO
D/A CONVERTER
IC106
32M FLASH
or
IC107
IC108
OTP
1M SRAM
AUDIO
AMP
L
AUDIO 1
R
R
LINE OUT
IC104
SYSTEM
CONTROL
S101
VIDEO OUT
SCAN SELECT
SWITCH
IC101
M
L
AUDIO 2
EEPROM
SERIAL BUS
M
+5V
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
IIC BUS
S001
EVER+3.3V
AI+5V
AU+11V
SW–13V
+1.8V
SW +3.3V
+5V
+11V
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
MS-81 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-6)
IF-92 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-35)
HS12S1U BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-39)
ND401
REG
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
EVER+3.3V
SW+3.3V
+5V
SW+11V
+11V (AUDIO)
SW–13V
D101
F101
SWITCHING
REG
AC IN
SW
P CON
SW201
POWER
IC404
IF CON
IC406
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
SHUTTLE/
CURSOR STICK
FUNCTION
KEY
POWER
PUSH
ENTER
05
3-1
3-2
DVP-NS715P
3-2. RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM
IC201 2 (DVD play)
200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV
IC201 2 (CD play)
200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV
IC201 tl (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV
IC201 tl (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV
570 mVp-p
550 mVp-p
1.4 Vp-p
1.4 Vp-p
BASE UNIT
KHM-270AAA/
SERVICE ASSY
IC201 rs (DVD play)
IC201 rs (CD play)
100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
180 mVp-p
MB-103 BOARD (1/4)
(SEE PAGE 4-11, 13, 17)
IC201
860 mVp-p
IC201 ra (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
IC201 ra (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV
1.5 Vp-p
1.7 Vp-p
DVD/CD RF AMP,
SERVO ERROR PROCESS
OPTICAL DEVICE
CN203
RF
A–D
22
2 RF IN
24
25
17
16
14
ı A–D
11
SIGO 59
IC301 <zxb (DVD play)
100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
FE 42
TE 41
PI 36
7
ı A2 – D2
10
DVD/CD
PD IC
E–H
VC
PD
SW
DVD LD
DVD/CD
LD MODULE
CD LD
VR
15
23
18
26
15
ı E–H
18
20
19 VC
21 DVDPD
22 CDPD
13
8
Q201
DVD LD DRIVE
6
Q202
CD LD DRIVE
FE
TE
PI
125 ADC1
124 ADC0
126 ADC2
MIRR 33
TZC 37
148 MIRR
152 TZC
SRD 45
SWD ı
SCLK 48
SDEN
159
161
162
167
DFT 38
MON 44
24 LEDSEL0
10
SIGO
SSDFCTI
SS MON
160 mVp-p
IC301 <zxv (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
GIO6/SDI
GIO7/SDO
GIO8/SCK
GIO13
1.4 Vp-p
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
IC301 <zxb (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
860 mVp-p
IC301 <zxv (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 mV/DIV
1.7 Vp-p
147 DFCTI
131 ADC7
25 DVDLD
129 ADC5, 6
130
VCI 39
IC301 (1/2)
LDON 27
26 CDLD
SERVO DSP
12
153 GIO0/INT2
+3.3V
IC202
42
40
VREF 43
FCS±
FOCUS
COIL
37
36
4
3
FOCUS
COIL
DRIVE
48
1
FDRV±
20 POM 2, 3
22
19
45
SLE
SPFG
PS 39
SPINDLE
MOTOR
SPM±
M
27
28
9
8
SPINDLE
MOTOR
DRIVE
13
21
SLED
MOTOR
SLA±, SLB±
M
32
ı
29
1
ı
4
SLED
MOTOR
DRIVE
XSDPCS
7
10
XRST
127 ADC3
128 ADC4
32 33
154 143 144 155 163 164 146
PWM2
47
46
7
HCS 12
15
POM 0, 1
17
GIO9/GREF
GIO10/FGIN
INLIM
INLIMIT
SENSOR
TDRV±
GIO2/INT4
5
CN204
XSDPIT
XRESET 61
3
4
PWM0, 1
TRACKING
COIL
DRIVE
GIO1/INT3
35
34
2
1
MDSO
MDPO
TRK±
TRACKING
COIL
HINT 11
MDSO, MDPO
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
SPMUTE
SLDA, SLDB
20
TSD-M 22
MS-81 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-6)
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
CN001
M
CN201
1
2
LDM±
25
24
5
4
LOADING
MOTOR
DRIVE
16
17
15
XDRVMUTE
TSD
LMP, LMM
LMCTL
S001
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
4
5
CKSW1
OCSW1
XLDON
CKSW1
OCSW1
2
1
05
3-3
3-4
DVP-NS715P
3-3. SIGNAL PROCESSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-103 BOARD (2/4)
(SEE PAGE 4-13 to 4-19)
IC404
IC405
16M SDRAM
IC303
65 – 74
1.4 Vp-p
MA 0 – 9
36 – 43
46 – 53
SDAD 0O – 15O
CS, WE,
CAS, RAS
135 – 138 140 – 143
145 – 148 150 151
153 154
CLK, CKE,
DQML, DQMU,
ADDT 0 – 15
105 – 108 110 – 113
115 116 118 120
29 – 31
121 122 124
125 127 129
130 132 133
SDDQ 0 – 15
MD 0 – 15
111 RFIN1
SIGO
ADAD 0 – 11
WE, RAS
LCAS, UCAS
RAMA 0 – 9
IC301 <zzz (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 100 ns/DIV
RF/SERVO
(SEE PAGE 3-4)
RAMD 0 – 15
16M DRAM
SD 0 – 7
113 RFIN2
IC301 <zzc (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV
IC301 (2/2)
ARP
1.4 Vp-p
77
ı
84
SDCK
XSHD
XSRQ
XSAK
SDEF
57
ı
59
63
64
DATA
BCLK
LRCK
DOUT
169
170
175
56
XARPIT
XARPCS
XWAIT
26 XINT
27 XCS
28 XWAT
A0–7
2
ı
9
33MARP
150 CLKIN
D0–7
134
ı
141
37
ı
40
42
ı
45
SDI 0 – 7
SDCK, XSHD,
XSRQ, XSAK, SDEF
47
ı
51
CDDATA, CDBCK,
CDLRCK, CDDOUT
HD 8 – 15
ICLKI
IERRI
ISTARTI
IVALI
IREQON
DVD 0 – 7
DVD 0 – 7
VIDEO/AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
27MCLK
D1CLKO 95
27MCLK
32
34
35
31
CDIN1I
CDBCKI
CDLRKI
CDIN2I
97 TDI
CDLRCK
HA 0 – 7
84
DVO0 ı
87
ı
DVO7 89
ı
92
DT0I
ı
DT7I
HA 0 – 21
HD 0 – 15
168 169
171 – 174
176 – 179
181 – 184
186 – 189
191 – 194
2–5
7 – 10
12 – 15
17 – 20
HAD0I
ı
HAD21I
HDATA0
ı
HDATA15
IC403
AV DECODER
24 XWR
25 XRD
XWRH
XRD
TCK 174
99 TCK
TMS 172
TRST 171
101 TMS
102 TRST
XFRRST
XRD
XWRH
HA 0 – 21
HA 0 – 21
HD 0 – 15
HD 0 – 15
207 RST
22 ACLK
XRST
512FSAVD
XAVDCS2
XAVDCS3
ACH12O
LRCKO
BCKO
DO
166 HAD23I
167 HAD22I
158
160
200
199
27MAVD
XAVDIT
CLKI
SCLKI
HWAITO
HIREQO
12
28
29
30
ACH12
LRCK
BCK
SPDIF
DM ACK1I
DM RQ1O
DM ACK0I
DM RQ0O
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
196 HCS
197 HRW
202 – 205
05
DREQ0
DACK0
DREQ1
DACK1
3-5
3-6
VIDEO/AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
DVP-NS715P
3-4. SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-103 BOARD (3/4)
(SEE PAGE 4-19 to 4-21)
IC106
32M FLASH
HD 0 – 15
1 – 5 102 – 109 111 – 118 120
HA 0 – 21
XRD
XWRH
IC104 tf
85 – 100
58 59 72 84
HD 0 – 15
CS0X
CS1X
XWRL
SRAMWE
HD 0 – 15
OTP
HD0 – 15
HA1 – 21
HA 0 – 21
HA0 – 21
HA 0 – 21
IC107
or
HD0 – 15
IC108
1M SRAM
70 XRD
71 XWRH
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
X0 54
XARPIT
XARPCS
XWAIT
XRST
17
62
67
35
1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)
X1 53
X101
16.5MHz
INT1
CS4X
XWAIT
XRST
XARPRST 36
AN3 15
RF/SERVO
(SEE PAGE 3-4)
XRST
XSDPIT
XSDPCS
XDRVMUTE
XLDON
CKSW1
OCSW1
18
63
48
82
56
57
INT2
CS5X
XDRVMUTE
WIDE
CKSW1
OCSW1
WIDE
IPSW
VIDEO/AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-10)
IC104
SYSTEM
CONTROL
CN101
IC101
EEPROM
WP
SCL
SDA
7 WP
39 SCL
38 SDA
25
26
27
51
20
76
MA MUTE
SO1
SC1
XDACS
83
29
30
79
4
1
3
6
5
8
XRST
SCL
SDA
16
46
47
49
50
60
61
XAVDIT
DREQ0
DACK0
DREQ1
DACK1
XAVDCS2
XAVDCS3
INTO
DREQ0
DACK0
DREQ1
DACK1
CS2X
CS3X
48/44.1k
VIDEO/AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
7
6
5
SI0
SO0
SCO
XIFCS
INT4
XFRRST
MA MUTE
SO1
SC1
XDACS
81
XFRRST
XRST
IC103 8
IC103
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
IC103 qg
PLL
1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)
14 FSEL
3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)
IC103 9, 0
XTI 7
X102
27MHz
XTO 8
33MARP
15 33-1OUT
512-2OUT 9
27MAVD
3 27-1OUT
512-1OUT 10
DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz)
CD: 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)
512FS2CH
IC103 3
512FSAVD
3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)
05
3-7
3-8
AUDIO/VIDEO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
SI0
SO0
SC0
XIFCS
XIFBUSY
XFRRST
INTERFACE
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-11)
DVP-NS715P
3-5. VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-103 BOARD (4/4)
AV-63 BOARD
IC504 rf
(SEE PAGE 4-23 to 4-25)
VIDEO ENCODER
21 SDA
22 SCLK
33 RESETB
IC102 ed
(SEE PAGE 4-29)
IC504
VIDEO BUFFER
2.4 Vp-p (H)
DAC A 44
J101 (1/2)
IC102
CN601
11
IC504 rd
VIDEO 1
CN203
V
15
3 VIDEO
IN
VIDEO 33
OUT
LINE OUT
2.4 Vp-p (H)
VIDEO 2
IC102 wl
IC502
J103
I/P CONVERTER
DAC B 43
SDA
SCL
XRST
SYSTEM
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
135 SDA
136 SCL
4 PLL EN
52
ı
Y[0]
48
ı
45
Y[9] ı
41
56
ı
CO[0]
60
ı
63
CO[9] ı
67
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-6)
DVD0 – 7
DVD 0 – 7
27MCLK
31
ı
28
25
ı
22
7 PI2
|
ı
14 PI9
PO[2]
ı
PO[9]
2 CLK27M
CLKO 40
7
Y
19
8 Y IN
Y OUT 29
2.0 Vp-p (H)
IC504 rs
Y0–9
2
ı P Y[0]
9
ı
12 P Y[9]
13
CBCR 0 – 9
14
ı P C[0]
18
ı
26
ı P C[9]
30
PO 0 – 7
32 CLKIN
63 CLKIN 2
110 – 113 MD0
116 – 119
ı
122 – 125 MD15
129 – 132
IC102 ea
Y
DAC C 42
1.8 Vp-p (H)
9
IC504 el
C
17
C OUT 31
6 C IN
1.8 Vp-p (H)
IC503
Y
WE, CAS,
RAS, CKE, CLK
2.0 Vp-p (H)
2.0 Vp-p (H)
IC504 ek
IC102 ws
16 MUTE2
J104
DAC D 39
1.3 Vp-p (H)
5
3
DAC F 37
1
Y/G
Cb/R
Cr/B
21
12 Y IN
Y OUT 24
23
15 Cb IN
Cb OUT 22
25
17 Cr IN
Cr OUT 20
1.3 Vp-p (H)
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
PB/CB
PR/CR
IC102 w;
IC504 ej
100
ı
104
2
C
7 MUTE1
DAC E 38
80 – 83 MA0
86 – 89
ı
94 – 97 MA11
A 0 – 11
S VIDEO OUT
IC102 wf
3.3 Vp-p (27 MHz)
16M SDRAM
1
C
53
ı S[2]
55
ı
58
ı S[9]
62
IC502 r;
DQ 0 – 15
2.0 Vp-p (H)
RSET1 47
RSET2 35
1.3 Vp-p (H)
1.3 Vp-p (H)
WIDE
RV502
RV501
PROG. VIDEO
LEVEL ADJ.
VIDEO
LEVEL ADJ.
2
24
Q104, 105
WIDE SWITCH
SYSTEM
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
S101
SELECTABLE
+5V
IPSW
12
14
INTERLACE
VIDEO OUT
SCAN SELECT
PROGRESSIVE
IC204
1 D IN
OPTICAL
16
SPDIF
SPDIF
Q211
BUFFER
10
IC601
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-6)
SYSTEM
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
3 SDTI
BCK
LRCK
2 BICK
4 LRCK
512FS2CH
XDACS
XRST
SC1
SO1
1
6
5
7
8
MCLK
CSN
PDN
CCLK
CDTI
COAXIAL
J101 (2/2)
AUDIO AMP
AOUTL+ 12
AOUTL– 11
17
15
AOUTR+ 10
AOUTR– 9
21
23
ALT+
ALT–
ART+
ART–
9
11
3
2
+
–
1
5
3
5
6
+
–
7
Q208
MUTE
L
AUDIO 1
Q207
MUTE
R
LINE OUT
L
AUDIO 2
DZFL 16
22
24
MAMUTE
LMUTE
MAMUTE
D202
4
R
Q202, 204, 205
MUTE DRIVE
2
CN202
2
1
05
3-9
DIGITAL
OUT
IC201
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER
ACH12
J201
3-10
A MUTE
VMUTE
INTERFACE
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-11)
DVP-NS715P
3-6. INTERFACE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
IF-92 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-35)
CN404
SI0
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
SI0
4
SO0
1
SC0
3
XIFCS
XIFBUSY
SO0
SC0
XIFCS
XIFBUSY
6
5
16 SO
BUZ 21
HS12S1U BOARD
IC406
BZ401
BUZZER
15 SI
(SEE PAGE 4-39)
REMOTE COMMANDER
RECEIVER
17 /SC
IR 11
14 /CS
27 BUSY
1
OUT
CN401
CN201
1
XFRRST
XFRRST
8
7 /FRRST
S411
S410
SURROUND
PITURE MODE
POWER
1
POWER 37
CN402
A MUTE
2
23 /AMUTE
VMUTE
1
24 /VMUTE
VIDEO/AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-10)
S409
S408
S407
S406
O/C 34
IC404
IF CON
S412
D413
PROG
80 PROG
PLAY 35
S405
S404
DISPLAY
S403
MENU
S402
RETURN
S401
TOP MENU
DISPLAY 36
CURSOR STICK
ND401
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
58
ı
41
47
ı SEG 1 – 18
64
5
ı
17
77
ı DIG 1 – 13
65
CN406
CURSOR
CURSOR 33
XIN 2
X401
8MHz
IC405
RESET
VOUT 1
XOUT 3
8 /RST
IC404 3
3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz)
05
3-11
3-12
3
PUSH
ENTER
SW201
POWER
DVP-NS715P
3-7. POWER 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
IF-92 BOARD
HS12S1U BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-35)
(SEE PAGE 4-39)
D221
CN201
L221
+11V (AUDIO)
13
T101
D211
Q211
L211
6
•
7
SW+11V
EVER+3.3V
D311
D311
P311
L311
CN101
1
2
F101
CN402
PS402
5
AU+11V
3
7
SW–13V
11
3
EVER+3.3V
12
6
AI+5V
2
+5V
6
•
7
5
+11V
8
4
+3.3V
Q404, 405
PS401
POWER 2
(SEE PAGE 3-15)
Q311
12
AC IN
EVER–13V
CN401
13
+5V
D101
L101
LINE
FILTER
L102
LINE
FILTER
CN403
SW+11V
IC611
IC101
Q611
D611
SW
+3.3V REG
SWITCHING
CONTROL
8
SW+3.3V
IC403
POWER 2
(SEE PAGE 3-15)
+1.8V REG
IC412
EVER
+3.3V REG
11
3 VIN
EVER+3.3V
VOUT 2
1
+1.8V
7
3.3V MNT
CN404
L511
EVER–13V
EVER+3.3V
3
SW–13V
P511
D511
PC101
PHOTO COUPLER
ND401
SHUNT REG
Q401, 402,
T401
IC406
D621/D622
(ON/STANDBY)
IC301
F1
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
Q621
LED DRIVE
DC/DC
CONVERTER
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
F2
D403 – 406
IC405
RESET
IC404
IF CON
Q712
POWER
CONTROL
2
P-CONT
2
30 PONCHK
26 PCONT
1
37 POWER
VKK
SW201
1
POWER
POWER
80
05
D413
PROG
CURSOR STICK
CN406
EVER +3.3V
3-13
3-14
2
PUSH
ENTER
DVP-NS715P
3-8. POWER 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
AV-63 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-29 to 4-31)
CN202
AI+5V
6
IC101
–5V REG
2 IN
IC102
VIDEO
BUFFER
OUT 3
Q201
POWER 1
(SEE PAGE 3-14)
AU+11V
5
SW–13V
7
Q203, 216
IC201
AUDIO AMP
IC203
+5V REG
3 IN
OUT 1
D201
EVER+3.3V
MUTE V
3
IC204
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CN203
1
AU+5V
MB-103 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-11to 4-25)
FL106
FILTER
IC107
or
OTP
IC601
CN601
AUDIO
D/A CONVERTER
25
IC401
FL108
FILTER
CN101
FL101
7
3.3V MNT
IC106
32M FLASH
FILTER
FL103
IC108
FILTER
1M SRAM
IC103
FL102
PLL
FILTER
CN102
POWER 1
(SEE PAGE 3-14)
IC101
FL404
EEPROM
FILTER
+1.8V REG
IC404
5 VIN
16M SDRAM
IC104
SYSTEM
CONTROL
VOUT 4
IC503
FL402
IC403
FILTER
AV DECODER
IC405
FL403
16M SDRAM
FILTER
16M SDRAM
CN204
FL110
+3.3V
4
FILTER
FL105
FL201
+5V
2
FILTER
FILTER
5
+2.5V REG
FILTER
5 VIN
VOUT 4
IC302
IC303
FL109
5
+11V
FILTER
IC202
IC201
FOCUS/TRACKING
COIL DRIVE,
SPINDLE/SLED/
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE
DVD/CD RF AMP,
DIGITAL
SERVO
16M DRAM
IC505
2 VIN
VOUT 1
+2.5V REG
IC301
ARP,
SERVO DSP
5 VIN
VOUT 4
IC504
VIDEO
ENCODER
05
3-15
IC502
I/P
CONVERETER
+3.3V REG
3-16 E
19
11
IC501
FL104
1
+1.8V
CN203
LED
VCC
MOD
INLIMIT
SENSOR
OPTICAL
DEVICE
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
For schematic diagram:
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor,
because it is damaged by the heat.
• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1/10 W) unless otherwise specified.
kΩ : 1000Ω, MΩ : 1000kΩ.
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and
tantalums.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve
B, unless otherwise noted.
• 2 : nonflammable resistor.
• 5 : fusible resistor.
• C : panel designation.
•
f
: internal component.
• C : adjustment for repair.
• U : B+ Line.
• V : B– Line.
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• Voltages are dc between measurement point.
• Readings are taken with a color-bar signal on DVD reference disc and when playing CD reference disc.
• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MΩ).
• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production
tolerances.
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR PRINTED WIRING
BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.
For printed wiring boards:
• X : indicates a lead wire mounted on the component
side.
• x : indicates a lead wire mounted on the printed side.
•
a
: Through hole.
• b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing.
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated.)
Caution:
Pattern face side:
(Side A)
Parts face side:
(Side B)
Parts on the pattern face side seen from
the pattern face are indicated.
Parts on the parts face side seen from
the parts face are indicated.
Note:
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part
number specified.
Note:
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce por tant le numéro
spécifié.
When indicating parts by reference
number, please include the board
name.
4-1
DVP-NS715P
DVP-NS715P
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
9
8
11
10
12
13
14
BASE UNIT
KHM-270AAA/SERVICE ASSY
CN203
1
TRK-
TRK+
25
2
TRK+
26P
MB-103 BOARD
24
3
FCS-
23
4
FCS+
N.C
22
5
N.C
CD LD
21
6
CD LD/N.C
N.C
20
7
N.C
DVD LD
19
8
DVD LD
LD GND
18
9
LD GND
SW
17
10
SW/N.C
MOD
16
11
MOD
VR
15
12
VR
PD
14
13
PD
GND
13
14
GND
E
12
15
E
AU+5V
25
1
AU+5V
D
11
16
D
MAMUTE
24
2
MAMUTE
C
10
17
C
ART-
23
3
ART-
G
9
18
G
LMUTE
22
4
LMUTE
VCC
8
19
VCC
ART+
21
5
ART+
VC
7
20
VC
RMUTE
20
6
RMUTE
GND
6
21
GND
P_GND_2CH
19
7
P_GND_AUDIO
RF
5
22
RF
P_GND_SPDIF
18
8
P_GND_SPDIF
F
4
23
F
ALT+
17
9
ALT+
A
3
24
A
SPDIF
16
10
SPDIF
B
2
25
B
ALT-
15
11
ALT-
H
1
26
H
RGBSEL
14
12
RGBSEL
GND
13
13
D_GND
EUROVY
12
14
IPSW
V
11
15
V
DISCEXT
10
16
DSEL
C
9
17
C
GND
8
18
D_GND
Y
7
19
Y
GND
6
20
D_GND
Y/G
5
21
Y/G
GND
4
22
D_GND
Cb/R
3
23
CB/R
WIDE
2
24
WIDE
Cr/B
1
25
CR/B
E
CN204
LED
4
SLA-
6
5
AI+5V
1
AU+11V
2
3.3V_MNT
H
CN101
1
2
2P
AC_IN(L)
AC_IN(N)
7
7
SW+11V
SW+11V
6
6
SW+11V
M_GND
5
5
M_GND
M_GND
4
4
M_GND
EVER-13V
3
3
EVER-13V
P-CONT
2
2
P-CONT
P-DET
1
1
POWER
5
6
M_GND
3
GND
+11V
2
+5V
4
1
6P
+1.8V
B to B
SW +3.3V
B to B
SW+11V
13P
CN403
I
CN401
9P
SRV1246JUC
BOARD
13P
CN404
CN201
CN406
IF-92 BOARD
J
05
FRAME
4-3
VMUTE
A_MUTE
1
1
V_MUTE
EVER+3.3V
2
2
AU+11V
GND
A_MUTE
3
3
EVER+3.3V
4
4
GND
AI+5V
5
6
7P
SW-13V
7
CN202
3
XFRRST
7
4
XIFBUSY
7P
5
XIFCS
SW-13V
6
SIO
GND
XFRRST
9
9
GND
3.3V_MNT
8
8
XFRRST
XIFCS
7
7
3.3V_MNT
XIFBUSY
7
SW+3.3V
SOO
8
8
8
SC0
D_GND
SW+3.3V
9
9
GND
9
10
D_GND
D_GND
IFRST
EVER+3.3V
10
10P
11
10
PCONT
11
D_GND
CN405
EVER+3.3V
+11V
+5V
+3.3V
12
5
12
GND
+5V
4
+11V(AUDIO)
+5V
13
3
13
2
+11V(AUDIO)
6P
OCSW1
MS-81 BOARD
CN102
1
+1.8V
CKSW1
5
6
OCSW1
GND
2
6
4
LDM-
3
XIFCS
CKSW1
4
FFC
(FMM-035)
SI0
3
5
2
GND
LDM+
5
LDM-
HARNESS
(AI-60)
5P
5
1
CN201
1
XIFBUSY
5P
SC0
SLA+
4
SLB+
1
4
2
9
SIO
8
SLA+
GND
SLB+
LDM+
AV-63 BOARD
SLB-
3
3
2
M
7
5
3
6
GND
2
SLA-
6
SCO
5
SLB-
CN001
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
LED
INLIM
9P
G
4
SPM-
7
GND
M
GND
8
CN101
SLED
MOTOR
3
SO0
F
2
25P
SPM+
1
INLIMIT
SWITCH
SPMINLIM
9
1
M
1
FFC(FMO-002)
SPINDLE
MOTOR
SPM+
9P
SOO
9P
CN203
25P
B to B
D
CN601
M_GND
OPTICAL
DEVICE
FFC(FMO-001)
FCSFCS+
B
C
26
CN402
26P
TRK-
6
A
4-4
CURSOR
STICK
5P
GND
1
EVER+3.3
2
CURSOR
3
N.C
4
N.C
5
DVP-NS715P
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MS-81 (LOADING) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: MS-81 board; 1,000 series –
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.
: Uses unleaded solder.
1
2
3
4
5
MS-81 BOARD
A
B
CN001
5P
JL001
LDM+
1
MB-100 BOARD (5/10)
LDM-
2
CN402
GND
3
CKSW1
4
OCSW1
5
(SEE PAGE 4-17)
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
JL002
JL005
S001
JL004
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
JL003
1
C
2
3
4
5
05
Power Block
(HS12S1U)
( SWITCHING REGULATOR)
IF-92
(INTERFACE CONTROL)
AV-63
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
MS-81
(LOADING)
MB-103
(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)
LOADING
4-5
4-6
MS-81
DVP-NS715P
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.
MB-103 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
: Uses unleaded solder.
MB-103 BOARD (SIDE A)
Power Block
(HS12S1U)
( SWITCHING REGULATOR)
CN101
CN102
CN103
CN203
CN601
D-3
C-1
D-4
B-1
A-3
IC104
IC301
IC302
IC403
IC501
IC502
IC601
C-4
C-3
C-2
B-4
B-1
B-2
A-3
IF-92
(INTERFACE CONTROL)
AV-63
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
MS-81
(LOADING)
MB-103
(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)
SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO
MB-103
4-7
4-8
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 BOARD (SIDE B)
IC101
IC103
IC106
IC108
IC201
IC202
IC303
IC401
IC404
IC405
IC503
IC504
IC505
D-4
B-3
C-5
C-4
B-1
C-1
C-3
C-3
B-4
B-4
A-2
B-3
A-2
Q201
Q202
A-1
A-1
SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO
4-9
4-10
MB-103
DVP-NS715P
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
MB-103 (RF AMP, SERVO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont
critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que
par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
12
13
14
MB-103 BOARD (1/8)
A
NO MARK:PB MODE
B+
B+
B+
B+
GND
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
+5V
+3.3V
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
RFMON
2
C241
0.1u
C244
0.1u
B+
FL201
B
R260
12k
C252
0.1u
C248
0.01u
R211
100
C263
10u
16V
SSCK
SSCK
SSWD
SSRD
3.3
3.2
0.6
3.6
26P
2.4
3.3
3.3
2.2
2.1
SSWD
C202
0.01u
CN203
C260
0.01u
C253
0.001u
C201
0.01u
3.6
4.1
4.1
4.8
2.7
OPTICAL
DEVICE
C251
0.1u
C247
0.01u
C255
0.1u
BASE UNIT
KHM-270AAA/
SERVICE ASSY
RF+
SSRD
3.4
SSCS
H
C
H
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
SSCS
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
26
21
VC
20
VCC
19
G
18
C
17
D
16
V33
RX
TPA
MEV
FNN
VNA
DIP
FNP
DIN
BYP
SIGO
AIP
VPA
AIN
TE
C233
4700p
FE
FE
3.3
3.3
3.4
RFIP
SDEN
RFIN
SCLK
CP
SWD
WIN
SRD
WPP
MON
CN
C
B
DVD_LD
F
TRACKING
COIL
TRK+
TRK-
3
2
JL202
FCS+
JL203
FCS-
JL204
TRK+
JL205
TRK-
G
SLED
MOTOR
M
INLIMIT
SENSOR
SPINDLE
MOTOR
H
M
SLA+
1
SLB+
2
SLB-
3
SLA-
4
LED
5
GND
6
INLIM
7
SPM-
8
SPM+
9
SSDFCTI
SSDFCTI
SS_MON
FE
TE
C265
0.1u
R273
0
JL206
SLA+
JL207
SLB+
JL208
SLB-
JL209
SLA-
SVC
R206
4700
PI
C266
0.01u
C264
0.01u
MIRR
R234
33
R236
33
4.5
DVD_LD
R245
47k
CD_LD
JL213
SPM+
3.8
2.2
INLIM
SPM-
TRK-
C234
47u
6.3V R246
100
R249
33
R248
33
4.8
R251
47k
Q202
2SB1132-T100-QR
CD LD DRIVE
4.8
L201 47uH
C221
10u
16V
C235
0.01u
C238
10u
16V
L202
47uH
TRK+
FCS-
FCS+
2.6
R263
2.2M
FCS+
SLB+
R264
100k
SLASLBR265
27k
SLA+
STM-
C256
0.047u
SPM+
INLIM
C254
0.01u
Q201
2SB1132-T100-QR
DVD LD DRIVE
JL212
0
MB-103 BOARD (4/8)
SSDFCTI
1.8
0
2.6
0
C257
0.047u
JL210
JL211
0
4
TZC
C261
330p
C245
0.01u
R210
330
G
TZC
3
SSRD
FCS-
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
9P
MIRR
TZC
TRK+
2.5
CN204
SSCK
SSWD
TRK-
G
FCS-
MIRR
MIRR
B+
4
BYP2
F
SSCS
MLPF
FCS+
FOCUS
COIL
E
MB
5
F
MIN
N.C
E
CD_LD
MP
6
PII
2.2
2.4
7
A
MEVO
N.C
CD LD/N.C
TZC
PI
LDON
8
B
2.5
DVD LD
A
0.6-1.2
C
CDLD
9
VCI
DFT
DVDLD
10
TZIN
D
LDSELO
SW/N.C
LD GND
D
VNB
11
D2
CDPD
MOD
R212
100
4.7
3.8
4.8
12
TE
IC201
SP3728ACB
DVDPD
VR
C2
FE
SERVO ERROR
PROCESS
VPB
13
A2
B2
VC
PD
JL201
H
14
2.5
2.5
4.8
0.2
0.2
DVD/CD
LD MODULE
15
TPH
IC201
H
E
E
GND
3.4
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
7
C210
2200p
C211
2200p
C212
2200p
C213
2200p
E
8
D
9
C236
560p
C
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
G
D
0
3.4
3.4
3.4
0
3.2
1.7
1.7
2.5
1.7
0
C262
0.1u
GND
PI
TE
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
22
R244
1k
1
RF
R235
100
2
DVD/CD
PD IN
23
PI
C232
4700p
3
F
F
ATOP
1
A
4
24
5
25
A
6
B
ATON
B
C242
47u
6.3V
SLB+
MB-103 BOARD (4/8)
SLASLBSLA+
STMSPM+
INLIM
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
XLDON
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)
R256
100
TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV
SIGNAL PATH
0.5
VIDEO SIGNAL
C243
0.01u
Y/CHROMA
SLED SERVO DVD/CD
AUDIO
SIGNAL
PB
FOCUS SERVO
SKEW SERVO DVD/CD
05
• Waveforms
1 IC201 2 (DVD play)
200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV
570 mVp-p
1 IC201 2 (CD play)
200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV
2 IC201 tl (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV
550 mVp-p
1.4 Vp-p
2 IC201 tl (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV
1.4 Vp-p
3 IC201 rs (DVD play)
100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
180 mVp-p
3 IC201 rs (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
4 IC201 ra (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
860 mVp-p
1.5 Vp-p
RF AMP, SERVO
MB-103 (1/8)
4-11
4-12
4 IC201 ra (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV
1.7 Vp-p
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (ARP, SERVO DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
3
4
• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
A
NO MARK:PB MODE
MB-103 BOARD
(5/8)
XRST
C331
0.1u
RAMD8
RAMD9
RAMD10
RAMD11
RAMD12
RAMD13
RAMD15
MDSO
R351
0
+1.8V
VDDA4 3.3V
VRTA
A6
8
A5
7
A4
6
A3
5
A2
4
ADC6
A1
3
ADC7
A0
2
3
VSS
1
ADC0
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
4
ADC4
1.7
ADC5
VSSA5
RAMD6
RAMD4
RAMD5
RAMD5
RAMD4
RAMD6
RAMD3
RAMD7
RAMD2
1
2
3
I/O2
I/O13
I/O3
I/O12
VDD
GND
I/O4
I/O11
I/O5
I/O6
I/O9
I/O7
I/O8
N.C
N.C
JL329
3.4
2.8
JL330
JL331
JL332
JL333
RAMA0
JL334
RAMA1
JL335
RAMA2
JL336
XRD
JL337
RAMA3
XWRH
JL338
C333
0.01u
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3.4
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8)
N.C
N.C
N.C
LCAS
WE
UCAS
RAS
OE
N.C
A9
N.C
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4
VDD
GND
C344
0.01u
TESTK2
3.4
0
JL340
RAMD8
3.2
3.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
RAMA9
RAMA8
RAMA7
RAMA6
RAMA5
RAMA4
3 IC301 <zxv> (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV
SIGNAL PATH
TDRV-
0
TESTK1
JL341
VIDEO SIGNAL
XWAIT
TDRV+
XARPCS
AUDIO
SIGNAL
Y/CHROMA
XARPIT
XSDPCS
0
TESTK0
XSDPCS
PB
XSDPIT
JL342
XSDPCS
JL343
XSDPIT
XSDPIT
SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)
1.7
2.5
0.9
0.8
1.6
1.4
2.0
1.2
0.2
HA7
MB-103 BOARD
(5/8)
HA6
HA5
TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV
SLED SERVO DVD/CD
HA4
HA3
FOCUS SERVO
HA2
HA1
SKEW SERVO DVD/CD
HA0
XRD
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
XWRH
VDD1.8V
LRCK/TDO
XWRH
FDRVFDRV+
1.7
1.7
3.4
3.0
0
TESTK1
B+
TESTK2
JL344
C339
0.01u
1 IC301 <zzz> (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 100 ns/DIV
R346
10k
R347
10k
R348
10k
R349
10k
4 IC301 <zxb> (DVD play)
100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
CDDATA/EMU1
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
CDLRCK/TDOKT
TCK
TMS
CDBCK/EMU0
XFRRST
R303 1k
1.7 Vp-p
MB-103 BOARD
(4/8)
TDRV+
1.7
TESTK0
JL411
JL326
JL325
JL324
JL323
0
JL327
0
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
JL321
JL322
JL320
JL319
JL318
JL317
3.4
3.4
JL316
JL315
CL315
JL314
0
1.7
1.6
CL314
CL313
JL313
JL312
1.6
1.4
1.1
0.8
0.9
0.7
0.7
1.2
3.4
1.7
1.7
0 0 0
• Waveforms
FDRV+
TDRV-
CDLRCK/TDOKT
XFRRST
XFRRST
TMS
HD10
TCK
HD11
CDLRCK/TDOKT
MB-103 BOARD
(5/8)
TMS
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
TCK
CDLRCK/TDOKT
HD13
SSCS
HD14
LMM
HD15
LMP
SLDA
SSCK
SLDB
SSWD
LMCTL
SSRD
SSDFCTI
05
RAMD9
1.4 Vp-p
TDRV+
JL311
MB-103 BOARD
(4/8)
3 IC301 <zxv> (DVD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
RAMD10
FDRV+
HD9
HD12
L
RAMD12
TESTK3
JL339
TESTK3
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
RAMD11
RAMD13
FDRV-
0
133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176
C337
0.01u
HD8
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
JL328
B+
K
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
RAMD14
RAMD0
C343
0.01u
1.7
FDRV-
3.4
33MARP
RAMD15
RAMD1
TDRV-
MB-103 BOARD
(6/8)
I/O10
3.0
2.8
3.0
2.8
XRD
C320
4700p
J
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
RAMD7
I/O14
4
RAMD3
GND
I/O15
I/O1
5
3.4
2.8
2.9
3.0
2.7
2.7
2.8
3.0
3.2
VDD
I/O0
6
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
9
3.4
HCS
3.4
HINT
TCK
C334
0.01u
TESTK0
TDI
C317
0.1u
C330
4700p
VSS
VRBA
TMS
C318
4700p
VDDD2 3.3V
VSSA4
TRST
R318
470
1.7
0
1.7
PDM0
BCLK/EMU0
I
C313
0.033u
SS_MON
JL308
TESTK1
VSSD2
DATA/EMU1
SVC
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8)
R335
4700
C316
4700p
VDDD1 3.3V
GIO12
R317
10k
A7
PDM1
GIO13
SPFG
R325
6800
MB-103 BOARD
(4/8)
VDD1.8V
1.7
VSSD1
VSS
PI
R314
470
R315
470
R316
4700
TESTK2
GIO11/TMC2
FE
SLE
3.4
3.4
1.7
1.6
1.8
1.7
2.3
VDD3.3V
GIO10/FGIN
TE
3.4
C319
0.01u
R313
470
H
B+
C329
0.01u
2
VSSA3
VRB
GIO9/GREF
0.01u
1.7
PDM2
GIO8/SCK
3.4
C314
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8)
TESTK3
GIO7/SDO
G
RFIN2
1.7
PDM3
IC301
CXD9703R
VDD3.3V
0.6
C328
0.01u
ARP,SERVO DSP
VDDA3 3.3V
GIO5/PGIN
R359
10k
1
RFIN1
VSS
GIO6/SDI
C305
4700p
CL302
VRT
GIO4/PGREF
C327
0.01u
R358 10k
IC301
VDDD0 3.3V
GIO3/INT5
CL301
RF+
VREF
VSSD0
GIO2/INT4
C326
0.01u
BIAS
GIO1/INT3
R324
10k
C304
0.01u
3.4
2.7
1.6
3.3
1.6
C325
0.01u
VDDA2 3.3V
GIO0/INT2
C309
0.01u
VSSA2
0.6-1.2
R323
2200
AOUT
TZC
F
GND
3.3
2.5
1.0
C324
0.1u
IREF
VSS
C308
100u
6.3V
3.3
0.5%
0.5%
C323
0.01u
C315
0.01u
R322
1k
0.5%
MDS0
CLKIN
R312 220
2.3
1.6
2.8
XRAS
3.2
XCAS
3.4
XMWR
3.4
XWAT
3.4
XCS
3.4
XINT
1.0
XRD
2.2
XWR
MDP0
Y
VDDA1 3.3V
VDD1.8V
VOUT
R334 1800
4.8
VDD1.8V
MIRR
NOISE
VIN
VSS
FR3
DFCTI
GND
C322
0.01u
5
CONT
4
1.3
1
4.8
MB-103 BOARD
(6/8)
2
IC302
MM1385ENLE
R326
10k
R302
0
3
B+
MD0
FR2
PWM2
R321
22k
0.5%
+5V
MD1
FR1
VSS
+3.3V
INP
PWM1
R328
27k
R329
2200
R330
2200
R331
2200
C312
0.068u
+3.3V REG
MD2
PWM0
IC302
R301
0
INM
VDD3.3V
B+
MD3
D7
SDI0
SDI0
MD4
VSSA1
D6
SDI1
E
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
3.3
1.0
0.5
SDI1
MD5
VDDA0 3.3V
D5
SDI2
R2
D4
SDI2
MD6
D3
SDI3
SDI3
MD7
R1
D2
SDI4
SDI4
R333
150k
C321
0.01u
R320
33k
0.5%
VCO
D1
SDI5
VDD3.3V
VDDA5 3.3V
R332
2200
SDI5
VSSA0
D0
SDI6
SDI6
1.7
0.7
2.4
3.3
132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89
SDI7
D
C310
100p
SDI7
R311
100
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
RAMD2
7
RAMD1
16M DRAM
GM71V18160CT-6TR
8
RAMD0
SDEF
3.4
3.2
3.0
2.8
2.7
3.4
2.7
3.0
2.9
2.8
9
VSS
MD8
MD9
MD10
MD11
MD12
MD13
MD14
LOCK
MD15
VDD1.8V
SDCK
DOUT
VSS
XSHD
XSRQ
XRESET
XSAK
VDD3.3V
MA0
SDEF
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MA5
MA6
MA7
MA8
MA9
VSS
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD7
SD6
VDD1.8V
SDEF
JITPWM
R327
10k
0.5%
RFD
VSS
R319
10k
0.5%
XSAK
PLCKO
XSRQ
XSAK
IC303
11 10
C332
0.01u
XSHD
XSRQ
IC303
B+
1.7
3.0
2.8
3.0
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
CL309
2.6
3.4
1.7
1.7
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3.4
2.6
3.4
3.4
B+
88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
C311
0.01u
XSHD
JL310
JL309
B+
SDCK
SDCK
MB-103 BOARD
(6/8)
R352
0
B+
0.6
1.5
1.7
1.5
1.5
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
CDDOUT
CDDOUT
MB-103 BOARD
(4/8)
B+
B+
R336
10k
B+
C
MDPO
C340
0.01u
C338
0.01u
CL308
RAMD14
SDCK
XSHD
CDDOUT
XSRQ
SDEF
XSAK
RAMA0
RAMA1
RAMA2
RAMA3
RAMA4
RAMA5
RAMA6
RAMA7
RAMA8
C335
0.01u
SDI0
SDI1
SDI2
SDI3
SDI4
SDI5
B
SDI6
SDI7
RAMA9
R360
100
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8)
MB-103 BOARD
(4/8)
1.4 Vp-p
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8)
160 mVp-p
TSD
MIRR
SPMUTE
TZC
INLIM
MB-103 BOARD
(4/8)
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8)
2 IC301 <zzc> (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV
1.4 Vp-p
4 IC301 <zxb> (CD play)
500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV
860 mVp-p
ARP, SERVO DSP
4-13
4-14
MB-101 (2/8)
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (AV DECODER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
3
4
• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MB-103 BOARD (3/8)
NO MARK:PB MODE
A
XRD
HA21
HA20
HA19
HA18
HA17
HA16
HA15
HA14
HA13
HA12
HA9
HA11
HA8
HA10
HA7
HA6
HA5
HA4
HA3
HA2
HA1
HA0
XWRH
XAVDIT
XAVDCS3
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
XWAIT
XAVDCS2
DACK0
27MAVD
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
DREQ0
DACK1
DREQ1
C428
0.01u
XRST
TESTIn
SDDQ2
HDATA7
SDDQ13
IOVDD07
CDLRKI
SDCS0On
CVS02
SDCS1On
DT0I
SDAD11O
IOVSS06
DT1I
1.7
SDAD9O
DT2I
DT3I
SDAD12O
IOVDD02
SDAD10O
DT4I
SDAD8O
DT5I
IOVDD06
1.7
DT6I
SDAD0O
DT7I
SDAD7O
CVD02
SDAD1O
ICLKI
SDAD6O
IERRIn
CVD05
K
ADDT1
ADDT14
ADAD11
ADAD10
1.2
2.0
1.9
2.0
3.4
2.0
1.9
2.0
1.1
1.7
1.9
2.0
2.2
1.7
ADDT2
ADAD0
ADDT13
ADAD1
ADDT3
ADAD2
ADDT12
ADAD3
C431
0.01u
C439
0.01u
ADDT4
HA2
1
2
3
4
5
DQ3
DQ12
VCCQ
VCCQ
DQ4
DQ11
DQ5
DQ10
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ6
DQ9
DQ7
DQ8
VCCQ
VCCQ
DQML
N.C.
DQMU
WE
CAS
CLK
RAS
CKE
CS
N.C.
A11(BA)
A9
A10/AP
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A4
A3
VSS
VCC
HA3
2.2
1.9
HA4
ADDT15
ADDT14
HA4
HA5
HA5
HA6
HA6
2.0
2.0
3.4
1.9
1.1
HA7
ADDT13
ADDT12
C446
0.01u
ADDT11
ADDT10
HA7
HA8
HA8
HA9
HA9
HA10
HA10
HA11
HA11
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
HA12
HA12
2.0
1.7
3.4
HA13
ADDT9
ADDT8
HA13
HA14
HA14
HA15
HA15
HA16
HA16
HA17
0.1
1.4
3.4
HA17
HA18
HA18
HA19
HA19
HA20
HA20
0.1
0.1
1.8
2.1
1.6
1.5
HA21
HA21
ADAD9
ADAD8
ADAD7
ADAD6
ADAD5
ADAD4
ADDT11
ADDT5
ADDT10
C432
0.01u
IC405
ADDT6
B+
ADDT9
ADDT7
ADDT8
ADDT0
0.1
0.1
ADDT1
ADDT2
3.1
2.7
3.4
0.6
ADDT3
C441
0.01u
R430
10
ADDT4
ADDT5
2.5
3.4
3.4
2.8
3.1
1.6
ADDT6
ADDT7
ADAD11
0.1
ADAD9
0.1
0.1
3.4
0.1
1.8
0.7
2.1
1.7
1.4
1.6
1.6
1.5
ADAD10
ADAD11
ADAD10
ADAD8
ADAD0
C435
0.01u
ADAD1
ADAD0
ADAD2
ADAD7
ADAD3
ADAD1
C442
0.01u
ADAD6
3.4
1.8
2.0
1.2
1.9
3.4
2.0
2.0
1.9
2.2
3.4
0.1
3.1
2.7
2.5
3.1
1.6
0.1
0.1
0.7
1.4
1.6
3.4
FL404
16M SDRAM
IC405
MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
VCC
VSS
DQ0
DQ15
DQ1
DQ14
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ2
DQ13
DQ3
DQ12
VCCQ
DQ11
VCCQ
DQ4
DQ5
DQ10
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ6
DQ9
DQ7
DQ8
VCCQ
DQML
WE
VCCQ
N.C.
DQMU
CAS
CLK
RAS
CKE
CS
N.C.
A11(BA)
A9
A10/AP
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4
VCC
VSS
2.2
1.9
2.0
2.0
3.4
1.9
1.1
2.0
1.7
3.4
ADDT15
ADDT14
ADDT13
ADDT12
C447
0.01u
ADDT11
ADDT10
ADDT9
ADDT8
0.1
1.4
3.4
0.1
0.1
1.8
2.1
1.6
1.5
ADAD9
ADAD8
ADAD7
ADAD6
ADAD5
ADAD4
C436
0.01u
ADAD2
ADAD5
ADAD3
ADAD4
IOVSS05
CVS05
TRST
TMS
IOVDD05
SDAD4O
TCK
SDAD3O
IOVSS02
TDO
IREQON
IOVSS04
SDAD5O
TDI
SDAD2O
D1CLKO
ISTARTIn
IVALIn
IOAVSS00
XSRQ
SDCKEO
CDBCKI
NC
XSAK
IOVSS01
BF_ID
SDEF
XSHD
SDRASOn
DVO7
SDCK
IOVSS07
CDIN1I
DVO6
C413
0.01u
SDCLKO
CDIN2I
DVO5
1.5
1.7
1.7
3.4
3.4
2.6
2.6
SDI7
DO
CVD04
SDI7
SDI7
IOVDD08
BCKO
DVO4
SDI6
SDWEOn
SDCASOn
DVO3
SDI6
SDI6
IC403
CXD1935Q
LRCKO
DVO2
SDI5
IOVDD01
DVO1
SDI5
SDI5
CVS06
DVO0
SDI4
AV DECODER
IOVDD04
SDI4
ACH56O
I2C_DATA
SDI4
1.7
3.4
1.5
1.5
C412
0.01u
IC403
SDDQM1O
CVS04
SDI3
SDI3
ACH34O
IOVSS03
SDI3
SDI2
SDDQM0O
ACH12O
I2C_CLK
SDI2
SDI1
IOVSS08
CVD03
SDI2
SDDQ8
CVD01
DSPACK1
SDI1
SDI0
ACLK
DSPACK0
SDI1
SDDQ7
CVS03
1.7
1.7
SDI0
SDI0
CVS01
HSYNCOn
CDLRCK/TDOKT
SDDQ9
FLDO
1.7
1.7
CDBCK/EMU0
SDDQ6
HDATA15
IOVDD03
SPDIF1
CDDOUT
CDDATA/EMU1
HDATA14
IREFI
0
CVD06
VREFI
R439
SDDQ10
HDATA13
IOAVDD00
BCK
HDATA12
VGO
3.4
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
0
LRCK
SDDQ5
DVDD33
JL404
MB-103 BOARD (8/8)
SDDQ11
IOVSS00
DVSS33
JL403
HDATA11
COMPOUT
ACH12
SDDQ4
AVSS02
C410
0.01u
HDATA10
COUT
1.8
1.7
0
512FSAVD
IOVDD09
AVDD02
HD15
HDATA9
ROUT
HD14
SDDQ12
BOUT
0.9
0.7
0.7
1.2
HD12
HDATA8
AVSS01
HD15
SDDQ3
CVD00
ADDT15
DQ13
1
HDATA6
ADDT0
DQ2
2
IOVSS09
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
HDATA5
1.8
2.2
3.4
2.0
1.9
1.9
2.2
3.4
0.1
3.1
2.7
2.5
2.8
1.6
0.1
0.1
0.7
1.4
1.6
3.4
VSSQ
3
CLKI
SCLKIN
PAVDD18P
MBIST_EN
PAVSS18G
SCAN_MODE
HAD23I
IOVDD11
SCAN_EN
HAD22I
HAD21I
HAD20I
CVS07
HAD19I
HAD18I
HAD17I
HAD16I
IOVSS11
HAD15I
HAD14I
CVD07
HAD12I
HAD13I
HAD10I
HAD11I
HAD9I
HAD8I
IOVDD12
HAD7I
HAD6I
HAD5I
HAD4I
HAD3I
CVS08
HAD2I
HAD1I
HCSn
HAD0I
HRWn
IOVSS12
HCPUMDI
CVD08
HIRQOn
HWAITOn
DMACK1In
DMRQ0On
DMRQ1On
DMACK0In
RSTn
1
2
SDDQ14
AVDD01
HD11
HD14
HD13
J
HDATA4
SDDQ15
IOVDD10
SDDQ1
GOUT
HD10
HD13
HD15
MB-103 BOARD
(2/8)
CVS00
AVSS00
HD12
HD14
I
3
IOVSS13
HD9
HD12
HD13
H
HDATA3
YOUT
HD8
HD11
HD11
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
HDATA2
AVDD00
HD7
HD9
HD10
HD10
G
4
HD6
HD8
HD9
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
SDDQ0
5
HD5
HD7
HD8
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.7
1.7
1.6
1.4
1.1
0.8
HD4
HD6
HD7
F
HDATA1
6
HD5
HD6
MB-103 BOARD (2/8,5/8)
HD3
IOVSS10
HD4
HD4
HD5
E
HD3
HDATA0
7
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
HD2
ADDT7
CRPCLKI
8
HD3
HD2
ADDT6
IOVDD00
9
HD2
HD1
ADDT5
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
HD1
HD1
3.4
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
C408
0.01u
IOVDD13
208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157
VSSQ
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
C438
0.01u
ADDT4
DQ14
6
3.4
1.2
1.9
3.4
2.0
2.0
DQ1
7
ADDT3
DQ15
4
1.7
1.8
1.7
3.0
0.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
2.2
0.5
0.2
0.7
1.6
0.8
0.9
2.5
3.4
0.9
0.8
0.9
2.5
1.7
0.8
2.3
2.3
2.3
0.2
1.2
2.0
1.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
1.7
3.4
3.4
3.4
2.2
1.0
ADDT2
DQ0
8
B+
VSS
VCC
9
ADDT1
3.4
1.8
2.0
HA3
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
ADDT0
R426
10k
HD0
HA0
MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
5
R412
10k
C
HD0
HA1
IC404
6
C423
0.01u
B+
B+
HD0
HA0
16M SDRAM
HA2
C426
0.01u
7
C422
0.01u
8
C416
0.01u
B+
D
IC404
B+
HA1
C407
0.01u
9
R405
100
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
MB-103 BOARD (7/8)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B
C425
0.01u
C404
1u
50V
C402
10u
16V
C406
10u
16V
R436
0
C449
0.01u
DVD5
DVD6
05
DVD7
CONT
GND
VIN
5
DVD4
3.4
4
DVD3
1
DVD2
3.4
2
MB-103 BOARD (7/8)
DVD7
DVD6
XFRRST
JL409
TMS
JL410
TCK
CDLRCK/TDOKT
1.8
3.4
3.0
3.4
1.7
1.5
IC401
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
+1.8V REG
DVD3
PB
DVD4
DVD5
JL408
VIDEO SIGNAL
IC401
TK11118CS
DVD1
DVD2
B+
SIGNAL PATH
DVD0
1.3
3
M
DVD1
B+
JL412
27MCLK
DVD0
DVD5
GND
R423
10k
R414
1200
DVD4
R413
6800
DVD3
FL402
JL402
+3.3V
C419
0.1u
R438
0
DVD2
B+
C417
0.01u
DVD1
C415
0.01u
+1.8V
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
0
R415
10
FL403
JL401
DVD0
L
JL417
B+
C418
0.01u
B+
JL416
3.4
0.9
1.2
0.4
1.0
1.7
1.7
1.1
1.1
1.8
JL415
JL414
1.7
JL413
JL407
JL406
JL405
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
0
C429
0.01u
R402
0
3.4
B+
3.4
3.4
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104
NOISE
VOUT
DVD6
DVD7
AV DECODER
MB-103 (3/8)
4-15
4-16
MB-103 BOARD
(2/8)
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
3
2
1
5
4
7
6
8
10
9
11
13
12
15
14
SIGNAL PATH
MB-103 BOARD (4/8)
SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)
NO MARK:PB MODE
A
TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV
SLED SERVO DVD/CD
B+
+3.3V
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
B+
B+
B+
FOCUS SERVO
R259
10k
+5V
SKEW SERVO DVD/CD
GND
B
C258
0.01u
1
CKSW1
2
GND
3
LDM-
C204
0.001u
R207
100
OCSW1
CKSW1
R218
120k
1.7
LDMLDM+
LDM+
B+
R217
1k
4
1.7
5
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
SPFG
1.7
(SEE PAGE 4-6)
OCSW1
C240
0.033u
SVC
C259
0.001u
4.8
MS-81 BOARD
CN001
C246
0.033u
3.2
C
C216
220p
R261
10k
1.7
FCS+
FCS+
FCS+
10.5
R216
1k
5P
C249
0.01u
R262
330
R232
33k
R255
56k
0.5%
CN201
R253
56k
0.5%
3.4
C203
0.001u
R214
10k
3.4
R213
10k
R254
100k
0.5%
3.4
R250
100k
0.5%
FCSFCS-
5.1
TRK+
TRK+
39
38
37
TRKTRK-
DO1+
40
PS
41
PVCC1
OPIN2+
42
OPIN2-
52
OPOUT2
43
VREF
44
SVCC
OPOUT1
45
SLA+
SLA+
1.7
DO1-
OUT1
DO2+
35
R239
33k
IN1-
1
1.7
36
SLA-
C226
220p
R220 C215
150k 100p
5.2
FCS-
5.1
TRK+
IC202
1.7
CL204
TDRVSLE
R241
33k
SLDA
1.7
1.7
IN4-
DO5-
OUT4
PGND2
IN5+
DO6+
SPM-
34
5.2
TRK-
SPM+
SPM+
C270
0.01u
33
30
29
DO5+
28
7
IN4+
8
DO4-
27
1.7
C229
0.001u
DO4+
OUT3
9
R223
56k
FDRVTDRV+
10
R240
33k
1.7
11
FDRV+
CL203
IC202
FAN8034L
IN3-
12
5.1
SLA+
5.3
SLA-
5.1
SLB+
5.2
SLB-
3.7
SPM-
6.5
SPM+
C272
0.1u
5.1
LDM+
H
R229
10k
C230
4700p
R233
470k
C214
0.015u
23
DO6-
PVCC2
TSD-M
3.4
22
10.5
3.4
21
C273
0.1u
24
5.1
LDM-
R269
10k
TSD
R243
470k
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
SPMUTE
C219
0.1u
C220
0.1u
R227
120k
MDPO
R224
270k
20
B+
R226
470k
CL205
C218
1500p
MDSO
19
MUTE5
MUTE12
50
18
3.4
17
SGND
REV
FWD
CTL
0
16
3.4
1.7
15
3.4
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
14
1.4
13
R225
10k
OUT5
IN5-
G
MUTE34
R242
220k
SLDB
3.4
F
1.7
SPM-
51
FOCUS/TRACKING
COIL DRIVE
SPINDLE/SLED/
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE
R222
56k
C228
0.001u
DO3-
32
DO3+
IN3+
31
3
PGND1
OUT2
49
1.7
IN2-
SLB+
SLB-
26
1.7
4
1.7
CL202
25
R238
33k
DO2-
5
C225
100p
R221
150k
IN2+
6
1.7
SLB+
SLB-
CL201
E
MB-103 BOARD (1/8)
SLA-
R230
33k
2
D
46
OPIN1-
IN1+
R219
120k
47
OPIN1+
48
R231
680k
XDRVMUTE
R252
33k
C250
0.01u
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
OCSW1
LMCTL
OCSW1
CKSW1
CKSW1
LMP
LMM
I
JL247
B+
B+
+11V
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
JL248
M_GND
C271
47u
16V
05
DRIVE
4-17
4-18
MB-103 (4/8)
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (SYSTEM CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
3
4
• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
A
NO MARK:PB MODE
B+
B+
B+
+3.3V
MA-103 BOARD (6/8)
HA0
GND
HA0
HA1
FL103
B
HA1
FL106
HA2
B+
HA2
IPSW
MA-103 BOARD (8/8)
HA3
HA3
XAVDIT
MA-103 BOARD (3/8)
HA4
HA4
JL123
SI2
JL124
MB-103 BOARD
(2/8,3/8)
R185
1k
HA5
XARPIT
MA-103 BOARD (2/8)
SO2
IC106
XSDPIT
JL125
HA5
XX
JL129
HA6
HA6
A16
2
A14
BYTE
3
A13
VSS
4
A12
DQ15/A-1
A11
DQ7
HA15
HA14
SO1
HA13
SC1
HA12
6
A10
7
A9
DQ6
8
HA11
A8
DQ13
DQ14
HA10
R104
100
HA9
JL109
HA18
HA8
1
HA7
HA17
HA6
HA5
HA4
DACK0
HA2
XDRVMUTE
HA1
DREQ1
HA0
DACK1
VSS
XIFCS
HD15
VSS
HD14
X1
HD13
1
X2
HD12
VCC
HD11
CKSW1
HD10
OCSW1
HD9
CS0X
HD8
CS1X
HD7
CS2X
HD6
WIDE
TRM-
XDACS
48/44.1K
OCSW2
CPUCK
XFRRST
VSS
1.0
XRD
2.2
XWRH
2.0
XWRL
3.4
NMIX
1.7
VCCI
BRQ
3.4
3.4
CS4X
3.4
CS5X
1.7
VCCI
XAVDCS2
R129
100
XAVDCS3
XARPCS
MA-103 BOARD (2/8)
K
XSDPCS
R117
1k
XWAIT
MA-103 BOARD (3/8)
XWAIT
MA-103 BOARD (1/8)
XLDON
R131
100
VSS
A2
CE
A1
A0
HD12
HA16
HD4
HA17
HA15
MA-103 BOARD (1/8)
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
HA16
HA17
C129
0.01u
HA18
HA18
HD11
HA19
HD3
HA20
HD10
HA21
HA19
HA20
HA21
HD2
HD9
HD0
HD1
HD0
HD1
HD8
HD1
HD2
HD0
HD2
HD3
HD3
HD4
HD4
HD5
HD5
HD6
HA1
HD6
HD7
HD7
HD8
HD8
IC107
HA14
HA13
HD9
HD10
HD11
HA12
IC107
MR27V3202F-7RTPZ04B
C122
0.01u
HA18
HA8
HA7
HA7
HA6
HA5
HA4
HA3
HA2
HA1
HA0
1.2
0.7
0.7
0.9
0.8
1.1
1.4
1.6
0.7
0.4
HA6
HA5
HA4
HA3
HA2
HA1
1.6-2.0
1.0
0.7
1.6
0.7
1.4
0.7
1.1
0.7
2.7
HD15
HD0
HD14
HD8
HD13
HD1
HD12
HD9
HD11
HD2
HD10
HD10
HD9
HD3
HD8
HD11
HD7
HD6
2
A18
HA21
A19
3
HA8
0.7
0.2
0.9
2.5
0.9
0.8
1.6
1.4
2.0
1.2
HA19
N.C.
A17
A8
4
HA9
1
HA11
HA10
A7
A9
A6
A10
A5
A11
A4
A12
A3
A13
A2
A14
A1
A15
A0
A16
CE
BYTE
VSS
VSS
OE
D15/A-1
D0
D7
D8
D1
D9
D2
D10
D3
D11
D14
D6
D13
D5
D12
D4
VCC
HD11
0
3.0
0.8
0.9
2.5
0.8
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.2
0.5
3.4
HD12
HA21
HD12
HD13
HA20
HD13
HD14
HA9
HD14
HD15
HA10
HD15
HA11
HA12
HA13
HA14
HA15
HA16
IC108
HA17
1M SRAM
1.2
0.7
0.7
0.4
0.7
0.5
0.9
0.5
3.4
IC108
HD15
HA5
HD7
HA4
HD14
HA3
HD6
HA2
HD13
HA1
HD5
HD12
HD4
HD1
HD2
B+
FL108
HD0
HD3
0.8
1.6
1.4
2.0
1.2
2.0
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
B+
HD4
HD5
1
MB-103 BOARD
(3/8)
HD9
HD10
OTP
6
HD6
10k
HD7
0.5
HA16
HA15
C120
0.01u
C111
0.01u
R130
100
3.4 0
3.4
3.4
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.5
3.4
R150
10k
MA-103 BOARD (3/8)
OE
A3
RF MON
HA14
R106
100
3.4
R141
10k
CL101
R133
0
B+
JL108
J
FL102
+1.8V
A4
1
DIAG
(JIG)
HA13
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
JL107
B+
MA-103 BOARD (6/8)
DQ0
HA15
HA15
RB102
R132
0
DQ1
DQ8
A5
HA14
HA14
HA13
HD5
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.7
3.4
2.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
IDT71V016SA15PH-TL
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CS
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O13
I/O3
I/O12
VCC
GND
GND
VCC
I/O4
I/O11
I/O5
I/O10
A5
A6
A7
OE
UB
LB
I/O15
I/O14
I/O6
I/O9
I/O7
I/O8
WE
N.C.
A15
A8
A14
A9
A13
A10
A12
A11
N.C.
N.C.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
HA3
IC104
MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1
A7
A6
HA13
HD5
1
SYSTEM CONTROL
DREQ0
CS3X
MA-103 BOARD (3/8)
HA5
HA4
DQ9
GND
HA12
HD6
HD13
2
OCSW1
HA6
IC104
MD2
BGRNTX
I
R128
100
MD0
MD1
A17
+3.3V
2
HA11
3
CKSW1
HA7
DQ2
HA12
4
3
C108
0.01u
X101
16.5MHz
EXT/DSEL
A18
GND
3
RFMON
HA10
HA11
5
2
MA-103 BOARD (4/8)
1.7
1.6
3.4
0
3.4
1.6-2.0
2.0
3.4
VCC
DQ10
HA10
HD7
HD14
6
1
R113 22k
R110 1k
EUROVY
DQ3
HD15
7
R112
100
H
HA8
RY/BY
VCC
4
6P
HA9
8
R124
10k
TRM+
WP/ACC
DQ4
DQ11
5
XDRVMUTE
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.1
HA9
RESET
6
DACK1
R123
10k
SCL
WE
N.C.
7
R111
100
HA10
HA2
DQ12
8
DREQ1
SDA
3.4
3.4
MA-103 BOARD (3/8)
HA11
2.3
2.3
2.3
0.8
2.5
0.9
0.8
0.9
3.4
2.5
0.9
0.8
1.6
1.4
2.0
1.2
0.2
HA16
A20
RXD
HA8
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
DACK0
HA12
RGBSEL
HA3
2.2
B+
DREQ0
XARPRST
XWAIT
G
HA13
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
3.4
3.4
EXT/DSEL
XRST
HD5
SCL
HA14
CS7X
MA-103 BOARD (8/8)
VSS
HD4
SDA
HA15
HD3
R120
1k
R121
1k
DSENS
HD2
WIDE
RGBSEL
3.4
0
0
3.3
3.1
VSS
CS6X
F
XRST
SO2
HD1
MA-103 BOARD
(2/8,8/8)
HA16
SRAMWE
R119
100k
SI2
MA_MUTE
SO2
HD0
3.3
3.3
SI2
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
R118
100k
DQ5
9
2
HA18
3
HA19
4
0.5
A19
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0.4
3.0
0.7
0.2
5
HA20
3.4
WP
6
HA21
7
HA22
AN0
AVSS
AVRH
8
9
XSACS
3.4
3.4
R156
10k
R162
3300
R163
3300
R165
3300
R168
3300
3.0
AN3
3.4
AN2
2.0
AN1
3.4
INT2
INT0
INT3
INT1
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
SI0
VCC
SC1
E
JL128
3.4
AVCC
3.5
3.4
3.4
R139
3300
3.4
HA19
R177
10k
R178
10k
9
HA17
HA18
HA19
HA20
SI0
SC0
HA21
C121
0.01u
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
SO0
3.3
3.4
SC0
8
7
3.4
3.4
R166
47k
HA21
R187
0
B+
3.4
3.4
3.4
1.5
3.4
GND SDA
SCL
C114
0.01u
SI1
A2
R161
4700
B+
C109
100u
4V
3.4
6
WP
3
A1
VCC
5
A0
4
2
1
IC101
BR24C64F-E
SO1
D
JL127
C102
0.01u
SO0
EEPROM
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
HA20
TXD
5
HA9
9
R103
100
HA7
6
HA8
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
IC101
HA7
R184
10k
MA-103 BOARD (8/8)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
C
HA17
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
A15
5
HA16
JL126
CN103
0.9
2.5
0.9
1.0
2.2
2.0
1.2
0.7
0.7
0.9
HA6
HA7
HA8
HD15
HD14
HD13
HD12
C130
0.01u
HD11
1.1
1.4
1.6
0.8
0.9
2.5
0.8
HD10
HD9
HD8
HA9
HA10
HA11
HA12
HD4
C118
0.01u
HD3
R105
100
HD2
HD1
HD0
XDACS
MA-103 BOARD (8/8)
MA_MUTE
L
4
3
MA-103 BOARD (2/8)
2
XFRRST
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
1
5
XWRH
M
MA-103 BOARD (3/8)
XRD
• Waveform
1 IC104 tf
SYSTEM CONTROL
MB-103 (5/8)
4-19
4-20
1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (CLOCK GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
9
10
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
NO MARK:PB MODE
*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.
B+
MB-103 BOARD (3/8)
33MARP
MB-103 BOARD (2/8)
IC103
1
PLL
512-1OUT
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
XTO
512-2OUT
1
XTI
27-1OUT
FSEL
27-2OUT
33-2OUT
C
C107
9p
X102
27MHz
5
*
1.5
C106
9p
VDD
VDD
6
3.4
33-1OUT
VSS
JL102
C105
0.01u
N.C
2
1.7
VDD
3
3.4
GND
4
SM8707AV-E2
9
IC103
C104
0.01u
4
C103
100u
4V
JL101
VSS
VSS
1.7
3.4
R134
22
JL103
JL104
3.4
R157
0
C110
0.01u
R136
22
JL105
0
0
R159
0
JL106
R137
22
R114
0
512FSAVD
MB-103 BOARD (3/8)
512FS2CH
MB-103 BOARD (8/8)
R160
0
3
2
1
CN101
5
JL110
D
27MAVD
R108
2.2
3.3V
B
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8,2/8,3/8,
4/8,5/8,7/8)
FL101
R176
0
7
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8,2/8,3/8,
4/8,5/8,7/8,8/8)
R116
22
8
A
2
JL130 JL111
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
R180
100
3
JL120
JL112
4
R181
0
R182
100
SI0
SC0
JL113
JL114
JL131
R183
100
SO0
JL115
9P
9
GND
8
XFRRST
7
3.3V_MNT
6
XIFCS
5
XIFBUSY
4
SI0
3
SC0
2
GND
1
SO0
IF-92 BOARD
CN404
(SEE PAGE 4-36)
E
MB-103 BOARD
(2/8,3/8,5/8)
MB-103 BOARD
(1/8,2/8,4/8)
B+
+1.8V
FB103
FL104
B+ JL132 JL116 CN102
FB104
FB105
B+
+5V
FL105
FB106
B+ JL133 JL117
JL121
L101
4.7uH
FB109
B+
FB107
FL109
FL110 FB111
FB108
B+ JL134 JL118
B+ JL135 JL119
+11V
C125
47u
4V
MB-103 BOARD (4/8)
F
C126
100u
6.3V
C127
47u
16V
C128
220u
4V
JL122
6P
1
+1.8V
2
+5V
3
GND
4
+3.3V
5
+11V
6
M_GND
IF-92 BOARD
CN403
(SEE PAGE 4-36)
M_GND
05
• Waveforms
1 IC103 3
3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)
2 IC103 8
1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)
3 IC103 9, 0
DVD : 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz)
CD : 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)
4 IC103 qg
3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)
CLOCK GENERATOR
4-21
4-22
MB-103 (6/8)
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (I/P CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
3
• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MB-103 BOARD (7/8)
A
NO MARK:PB MODE
R511
100
SDA
DQ7
DQ8
DQ6
DQ9
DQ5
DQ4
DQ10
DQ11
DQ3
DQ2
C513
0.01u
DQ12
DQ13
C512
0.01u
DQ1
C511
0.1u
DQ14
R536
100
DQ0
SCL
DQ15
C503
47u 6.3V
CL540
CL539
CL538
CL537
CL533
CL531
CL529
CL528
CL525
CL523
CL521
CL519
CL517
CL515
CL513
CL511
IC503
IC503
E
JL503
JL504
1.8
1.1
1.1
1.7
3.4
PO7
PO6
PO5
F
PO4
1.0
0.4
1.2
0.9
PO3
PO2
PO1
PO0
CL502
G
CL503
3.4
2
3
CVDD
MD7
MD8
MD6
MD9
OVDD
MD5
OVSS
MD10
MD4
MD11
OVDD
MD3
OVSS
MD12
MD2
MD13
CVSS
OVSS
MD1
OVDD
MD14
MD0
SLV
MD15
CSB
SCL
SDA
SRN
OVSS
CVDD
PLL_VDD
VCOIN
CPOUT
PI3
CKE
PI4
RAS
PI5
OVSS
PI6
OVDD
PI7
MA9
PI8
MA11
PI9
MA8
NHSI
MA10
NVSI
OVDD
IC502
OVSS
IVSS
CVSS
IVSS
I/P CONVERTER
CVSS
OVSS
IC502
CXD9698R
NVSO
MA7
NHSO
MA0
PO9
MA6
PO8
MA1
PO7
OVSS
PO6
OVDD
OVDD
MA5
OVSS
MA2
PO5
MA4
PO4
MA3
PO3
OVSS
PO2
OVDD
PO1
MD16
PO0
MD17
TSET0
MD18
OVSS
MD19
OVDD
OVDD
1.7
0.3
1.7
0.3
1.7
3.4
1.5
1.3
3.4
DQ6
DQ7
CL542
C521
0.1u
CL543
CL544
CL545
3.3
3.1
3.3
A9
A11
CL546
CL547
1.7
1.7
0.2
0.2
0.3
2.0
3.4
A11
A8
A10
A10
A0
A1
A2
A3
1.6
0.2
1.6
0.2
3.4
1.5
0.3
1.6
2.0
CL548
A7
CL549
A0
CL550
A6
CL551
A1
CL552
C516
0.01u
A5
CL553
A2
CL554
A4
CL555
A3
DQ1
DQ14
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ2
DQ13
DQ3
DQ12
VCCQ
VCCQ
DQ4
DQ11
DQ5
DQ10
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ6
DQ9
DQ7
DQ8
VCCQ
VCCQ
DQML
WE
N.C.
DQMU
CAS
CLK
RAS
CKE
CS
N.C.
A11(BA)
A9
A10/AP
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4
VSS
VCC
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
DVD7
CAS
CL541
1
DVD6
PI2
MCLK
3.3
1.8
3.1
3.4
0.3
2
DVD5
1
DQ5
3
DVD4
WE
DQ4
DQ15
4
DVD3
PI1
TEST3
VSS
DQ0
5
DVD2
PI0
OVSS
TEST4
DQ3
3.4
HY57V161610DTC-7TR
VCC
6
DVD1
PLL_EN
OVDD
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
MB-103 BOARD (3/8)
4
0.9
1.2
0.4
1.0
1.7
1.1
1.1
1.8
DVD0
PLL_TEST
5
C502
0.001u
CLKI
6
3.4
OVDD
7
R507
100
XRST
0.7
1.7
3.4
1.8
1.9
DQ2
8
27MCLK
DQ1
9
CL501
3.4
1.5
DQ0
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
C505
0.01u
1
C504
0.1u
C
D
PLL_GND
IVDD
144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109
3.4
1.5
1.6
7
B+
8
2.5
9
3.4
1.3
1.5
0.8
1.3
3.4
1.2
1.8
1.0
1.9
1.3
0.7
1.4
1.7
16M SDRAM
2.6
1.5
1.3
1.6
3.4
3.4
2.5
2.5
3.4
3.2
3.3
0.9
0.9
C510
47u
6.3V
R514 20k
B
CL509
C515
0.1u
R513
75
B+
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
MB-103 BOARD
(5/8,8/8)
2.6
1.3
DQ15
DQ14
1.3
1.4
3.4
1.2
1.0
DQ13
DQ12
C526
0.1u
DQ11
DQ10
1.3
0.8
3.4
DQ9
DQ8
C527
0.1u
1.8
3.4
0.3
0.3
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.6
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
B+
C520
47u
6.3V
C518
0.1u
3.4
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA
3.4
Y
Y/CHROMA
IVDD
CVDD
OVSS
W31F
FILM
CO9
CO8
CO7
CO6
CO5
OVDD
OVSS
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
CO0
OVSS
CVSS
OVDD
YO0
YO1
YO2
YO3
YO4
OVSS
OVDD
YO5
YO6
YO7
YO8
YO9
CLKO
H
TEST2
CVDD
TEST1
PB
2.5
3.4
JL505
CL536
CL535
CL534
0.7
1.3
1.0
1.0
2.4
CL532
CL530
CL527
CL526
0.2
0.5
1.0
0.7
3.4
CL522
CL524
0
CL520
3.4
CL518
CL516
1.3
1.3
1.3
0.3
CL514
CL512
0
CL510
CL508
CL507
CL506
CL504
CL505
1.9
1.3
1.3
1.3
2.1
1.3
3.4
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
2.5
C506
47u
6.3V
I
CBCR9
CBCR8
CBCR7
CBCR6
CBCR5
CBCR4
CBCR3
CBCR2
C546
0.1u
1
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
C508
47u
6.3V
CBCR1
CBCR0
C514
0.01u
C507
0.1u
2
• Waveform
3
4
J
IC501
5
NOISE
1 IC502 <z/c>
MB-103 BOARD (8/8)
+2.5V REG
VOUT
4
1
GND
VIN
2.5
R512
0
B+
K
2
1.3
CONT
3
IC501
MM1385NNLE
3.4
B+
+3.3V
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
5
GND
C517
0.01u
C501
0.01u
C509
47u
6.3V
1.6 Vp-p (66 MHz)
I/P CONVERTER
MB-103 (7/8)
4-23
4-24
DVP-NS715P
MB-103 (VIDEO ENCODER, AUDIO D/A CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: MB-103 board; 2,000 series –
2
1
3
4
5
• See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SIGNAL PATH
MB-103 BOARD (8/8)
VIDEO SIGNAL
NO MARK:PB MODE
A
13
CHROMA
Y
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
B+
PO0
C540
0.22u
JL507
2.5
0.4
1.2
0.9
1.8
1.9
1.1
1.1
1.7
1.0
B
JL509
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PB
DAC E
DAC F
P_Y[9]
COMP2
5
P_C[0]
P_C[1]
RSET2
2.5
RTC/SCRESET/TR
1.8
CLKIN
EXT_LF
RESETB
R570
1200
R585
10k
3
JL511
JL506
JL508
1.3
1.0
1.0
2.4
0.7
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
0.7
R613
0
R614
0
C542
0.22u
0.5
0.6
0.6
1.5
1.2
1.3
3.1
R571
1200
3
1
2 RV502
1k
R573
100
C543
0.001u
R579
300
0.5%
R574
300
0.5%
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1.0
RV501
1k
VIDEO
LEVEL ADJ.
C537
0.1u
1.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
2.5
2
1
P_C[9]
P_C[7]
SPI_12C_EN
P_C[4]
P_C[3]
E
P_C[8]
P_C[2]
2.5
1.3
C538
0.1u
DAC D
6
P_Y[8]
VAA
GND
7
GND
DAC C
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
S_VSYNC
S[0]
S_HSYNC
S[1]
S[2]
S[3]
S[4]
VDD
GND
S[5]
S[6]
S[7]
1
2
DAC B
2
P_C[6]
CBCR2
VDD
P_C[5]
CBCR1
IC504
ADV7300
P_BLANK
CBCR0
VIDEO ENCODER
P_Y[7]
COMP1
DAC A
3
P_VSYNC
Y9
IC504
P_Y[6]
P_HSYNC
1.3
1.3
0
0.2
0.5
P_Y[5]
SCLK
C529
0.22u
Y8
P_Y[4]
SDA
D
P_Y[3]/TESTMODE
ALSB
Y7
S[8]
CLKIN_2
GND_IO
Y6
4
Y5
4
P_Y[2]/SCANEN
5
Y4
VREF
6
Y3
RSET1
P_Y[1]
7
Y2
P_Y[0]
S_BLANK
8
Y1
VDD_IO
9
Y0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
3.4
0
0.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
2.5
C528
0.01u
C
3
+3.3V
S[9]
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
B+
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
RV502
PROG. VIDEO
LEVEL ADJ.
1
R575
R577
300
300
0.5%
0.5%
R576
R578
300
300
0.5%
0.5%
SPDIF1
MB-103 BOARD (3/8)
MA_MUTE
R619
RGBSEL
0
IPSW
B+
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
EXT/DSEL
C532
470p
C534
3900p
4
G
5
CONT
GND
C539
820p
JL601
JL602
2.5
JL603
1.3
4
3
3.4
VIN
1
2
C541
47u
6.3V
2
3.4
R568
680
1
MB-103 BOARD (7/8)
WIDE
+2.5V REG
IC505
MM1385NNLE
CBCR9
CBCR8
CBCR7
CBCR6
C533
470p
CBCR4
CBCR3
R559
100
R558
100
CBCR5
IC505
C531
0.22u
VOUT NOISE
3
F
JL604
C544
0.01u
SCL
SDA
5
R601
100
XRST
XDACS
MB-103 BOARD (5/8)
SC1
SO1
I
AOUTL+
CSN
AOUTL-
CCLK
AOUTR+
CDTI
AOUTR-
1
PDN
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LRCK
9
ACH12
JL609
CXD9627A-E2
BICK
DZFR
SDTI
VDD
LRCK
VSS
2
DZFL
3
MB-103 BOARD (3/8)
IC601
4
BCK
JL608
MCLK
5
512FS2CH
6
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
1.7
1.7
0
1.7
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
JL607
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER
7
H
SDA
SDA
8
MB-103 BOARD (7/8)
JL606
C604
0.01u
IC601
SCL
SCL
JL605
C545
0.01u
0
0
4.9
JL622
JL610
B+
C602
0.22u
C603
10u
16V
JL611
JL612
JL613
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
JL614
JL615
JL616
JL617
C601
0.001u
JL618
JL619
JL620
05
JL623
• Waveforms
1 IC504 es
2 IC504 rs
1.8 Vp-p (H)
3.3 Vp-p (27 MHz)
3 IC504 rd
2.0 Vp-p (H)
4 IC504 rf
2.4 Vp-p (H)
JL621
CN601
25P
1
Cr/B
2
WIDE
3
Cb/R
4
GND
5
Y/G
6
GND
7
Y
8
GND
9
C
10
DISCEXT
11
V
12
EUROVY
13
GND
14
RGBSEL
15
ALT-
16
SPDIF
17
ALT+
18
P_GND_SPDIF
19
P_GND_2CH
20
RMUTE
21
ART+
22
LMUTE
23
ART-
24
MAMUTE
25
AU+5V
5 IC504 ej
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
CN203
(SEE PAGE 4-31)
6 IC504 ek
1.3 Vp-p (H)
1.3 Vp-p (H)
7 IC504 el
2.0 Vp-p (H)
4-26
VIDEO ENCODER, AUDIO D/A CONVERTER
4-25
MB-103 (8/8)
DVP-NS715P
AV-63 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
– Ref. No.: AV-63 board; 1,000 series –
: Uses unleaded solder.
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.
D1/D2
VIDEO OUT
Power Block
(HS12S1U)
( SWITCHING REGULATOR)
IF-92
(INTERFACE CONTROL)
AV-63
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
MS-81
(LOADING)
MB-103
(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)
AV-63 BOARD
CN103
CN202
A-8
B-7
D001
D002
D003
D101
D102
D103
D104
D201
D202
D205
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-5
A-5
A-6
A-5
B-1
C-1
C-7
IC101
IC102
IC201
IC203
IC204
A-7
B-5
B-3
C-2
A-2
Q101
Q105
Q106
Q107
Q201
Q202
Q203
Q204
Q205
Q207
Q208
Q211
Q216
B-6
B-6
B-4
B-4
B-7
B-1
C-7
B-1
B-1
A-3
A-3
A-2
B-7
AUDIO DSP
AV-63
4-27
4-28
DVP-NS715P
AV-63 (VIDEO BUFFER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: AV-63 board; 1,000 series –
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
SIGNAL PATH
AV-63 BOARD (1/2)
A
9
VIDEO SIGNAL
NO MARK:PB MODE
CHROMA
Y
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
2L
PB
1L
R162
0
B+
L101
100uH
AI+5V
2R
1R
B-
VMUTE
J101
B-
B
Y_IN(NC)
DCCNT2
+5V(NC)
Y_OUT
GND
Cb_IN
GND
Cb_OUT
MUTE2
Cr_IN
NC
Cr_OUT
-5V
-5V
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1
2
NC
3
4.5
0.6
R133
68
4
C126
47u
16V
Q104
UN2213-TX
WIDE SWITCH
0.1
5
0.1
-5.0
S VIDEO OUT
6
R134
68
IC101
NJM79M05DL1A(TE2)
G
C114
0.1u
JL120
C113
47u
16V
2
1
0
DSEL
Q107
UN2213-TX
I/P SWITCH
R126
68
JL123
B-
J104
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
R128
68
-5.0
JL124
R157
1k
B+
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
JL122
R127
68
5.0
3
-12.2
VIDEO BUFFER
Q106
UN2113-TX
I/P SWITCH
OUT
IN
GND
5.0
B-
D104
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
3.4
F
2
D103
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
R115
3300
-13V REG
1
D102
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
IC102
R121
3300
IC101
JL119
D101
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
R170
68
0
WIDE
VIDEO 1
R169
68
0
E
VIDEO 2
J103
0.6
-5.0
-5.0
C111
47u
16V
4.7
JL117
Y
-5V
NC
R131
68
C
-5V
NC(GND)
JL116
G
4.5
NC(DCCNT2)
NC
Y_OUT
L
LINE OUT
R130
68
G
Q105
UN2111-TX
WIDE SWITCH
Y_IN
C112
0.1u
0.1
AUDIO 1
L
Y
CR/B
MUTE1
GND
C_OUT
4.5
0.6
AUDIO 2
C
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
C_IN
2
R
G
0.6
3.4
0.6
-5.0
CB/R
GND
VIDEO_OUT
1
R
G
D
4
Y/G
DCCNT1
5
0.5
1.1
+5V
6
C110
47u
16V
VIDEO_IN
7
Y
NC
8
0.6
3.4
0.5
1.1
C
NC
NC
9
0.5
0.6
V
NC
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
C109
0.047u
R129
10k
LA73053-TLM-E
3
IC102
C
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
P_GND
B+
R158
1k
Cr
Cb
Y
S101
R159
1k
SELECTABLE
SW-13V
INTERLACE
SCAN SELECT
PROGRESSIVE
D_GND
C101 C102
0.01u 47u
16V
ET101
IPSW
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
C103
220p
H
05
• Waveforms
1 IC102 ed
2.4 Vp-p (H)
3 IC102 wl
5 IC102 ws
2.0 Vp-p (H)
4-29
1.3 Vp-p (H)
2 IC102 ea
1.8 Vp-p (H)
4 IC102 wf
6 IC102 w;
2.0 Vp-p (H)
1.3 Vp-p (H)
4-30
VIDEO BUFFER
AV-63 (1/2)
DVP-NS715P
AV-63 (AUDIO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: AV-63 board; 1,000 series –
3
2
1
• See page 4-27 for printed wiring board.
5
4
7
6
8
10
9
11
13
12
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
A
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
NO MARK:PB MODE
CHROMA
R201
4700
0.5%
R210
2200
CR/B
R202
4700
0.5%
Y/G
Y
B
R205
5600
0.5%
C207
0.01u
R212
5600
0.5%
C201
560p
CB/R
AV-63 BOARD (1/2)
15
14
Y
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
PB
C233
47u
16V
R226
470
R208
2200
C203
180p
C
C206
180p
B+
IPSW
WIDE
1.3
V
1.3
0
10.6
R229
47k
D_GND
5
7
8
IC201
DSEL
AUDIO AMP
IC201
BA4558F-E2
0
Q207
TRANSISTOR2SD1938
(F)-ST(TX).SO
0.8
R280
0
MB-103 BOARD (8/8)
CN601
(SEE PAGE 4-26)
F
WIDE
24
CB/R
23
D_GND
22
Y/G
21
D_GND
20
Y
19
D_GND
18
C
17
DSEL
16
V
15
IPSW
14
D_GND
13
RGBSEL
12
ALT-
11
SPDIF
10
ALT+
9
P_GND_SPDIF
8
P_GND_AUDIO
7
RMUTE
6
ART+
5
LMUTE
4
ART-
3
MAMUTE
2
AU+5V
1
-10.1
JL229
C204
180p
JL236
JL232
JL234
JL235
R203
4700
0.5%
R206
5600
0.5%
R204
4700
0.5%
C202
560p
R234
4700
0
0
C205
180p
1L
R238
100k
R241
470
2L
R242
470
C234
47u
16V
R207
2200
Q208
TRANSISTOR2SD1938
(F)-ST(TX).SO
R240
470
1R
R227
470
R243
470
2R
C208
0.01u
R211
5600
0.5%
R209
2200
R230
47k
JL237
JL238
AV-63 BOARD (1/2)
Q202,204,205
MUTE DRIVE
JL239
JL215
Q205
2SB709A-QRS-TX
10.0
JL205
C209
1u
50V
JL210
R224
10k
9.9
9.2
JL207
JL208
R222
10k
JL206
R259
0
JL214
JL211
D202
DAP202K-T-146
B-
R228
10k
SW-13V
AI+5V
P_GND
6.0
2
JL213
0.6
JL212
R213
4700
B+
IC203
R253
1k
2.4
1.7
C229 R256
1k
47u
16V
1
R251
68
H
R282
0
R252
10k
JL202
1
1.7
JL203
2
4.9
IC203
NJM78L05UA-TE1
2
D201
DAN202K-T-146
JL222
C231
220u
16V
JL223
R225
47k
JL224
B+
3
JL225
JL226
10.6
B+
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
JL221
1
B+
R254
1k
C228
47u
16V
JL201
2
R279
0
Q202
UN2213-TX
3
AU+5V REG
4.9
R249
220
C222
0.01u
C223
0.01u
C224
47u
16V
10.6
JL228
C242
R285 330u
10k 6.3V
10.7
B+
I
Q201
2SB710A-RTX
B+ SWITCH
-10.6
Q203
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
C227
47u
16V
10.0
6
AI+5V
5
AU+11V
4
GND
3
EVER+3.3V
2
A_MUTE
1
VMUTE
IF-92 BOARD
CN402
(SEE PAGE 4-36)
R219
220k
-10.1
-10.8
D205
1SS355TE-17
R218
100k
Q203,216
B- SWITCH
-12.2
Q216
2SB709A-QRS-TX
-11.4
R221
10k
C244
47u
16V
C232
220p
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT
AUDIO AMP
AV-63 (2/2)
SW-13V
R216
5600
-10.8
ET202
IC204
05
7P
7
D_GND
B+
3
IC204
GP1FA550TZ
CN202
B+
JL204
GND
VMUTE
B+
0
6.0
3
JL216
J201
Q204
DTC124TKA-T146
1
4.9
VCC
0.8
1
JL233
Q211
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
BUFFER
OPTICAL
2
JL230
G
D IN
3
1.3
25
IN
E
CR/B
GND
D
4
JL217
1.3
25P
OUT
CN203
R235
4700
B-
AV-63 BOARD (1/2)
C
6
4-31
4-32
R220
470
AV-63 BOARD (1/2)
DVP-NS715P
IF-92 (INTERFACE CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
– Ref. No.: IF-92 board; 1,000 series –
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.
: Uses unleaded solder.
PROGRESSIVE
PICTURE MODE
SURROUND
Power Block
(HS12S1U)
( SWITCHING REGULATOR)
IF-92 BOARD
CN405
CN406
D-2
D-2
D403
D404
D405
D406
D412
D413
E-11
E-11
E-11
E-11
E-11
E-13
IC403
IC404
IC405
IC406
A-10
D-9
B-10
E-12
Q401
Q402
Q404
Q405
D-11
D-12
B-13
B-12
IF-92
(INTERFACE CONTROL)
AV-63
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
MS-81
(LOADING)
MB-103
(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)
INTERFACE CONTROL
4-33
4-34
IF-92
DVP-NS715P
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont
critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que
par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
IF-92 (IF CON) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: IF-92 board; 1,000 series –
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
IF-92 BOARD
A
B-
NO MARK:PB MODE
*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.
B-
JL411
B+
JL412
B+
CN402
JL413
JL414
B+
B+
JL415
JL416
CN401
JL417
13P
JL401
POWER
1
P-CONT
2
EVER-13V
3
B
SRV1246J BOARD
CN201
GND
4
GND
5
SW+11V
6
SW+11V
7
SW+3.3V
8
GND
C
JL402
GND
10
11
SW+5V
12
+11V(AUDIO)
13
-12.2
JL405
B+
JL406
B+
FB401
B-
-12.2
B+
B+
JL418
B+
JL419
Q404
2SD1766-T100-QR
PS401
1.0A
JL404
9
EVER+3.3V
B-
JL403
R415 1800
JL421
B+
JL422
JL423
3.3
C412
0.01u
C411
100u
16V
C409
0.01u
3.5
R418
10k
JL407
B+
B+
C429
100u
25V
C414
0.01u
B+
JL409
B+
JL410
B+
Q405
UN2111-TX
C401
0.01u
C416
0.01u
B+
B+
PS402
0.7A
B+
B+
D
B+
R424
33
R425
100
JL425
R481
100
JL426
IC403
LMS8117ADTX-1.8/NOPB
E
R482
100
JL427
R483
100
JL428
R484
100
JL429
VOUT
GND
1
B+
2
A_MUTE
1
V_MUTE
AV-63 BOARD (2/2)
CN202
6P
1
+1.8V
2
+5V
3
GND
4
SW +3.3V
5
+11V
6
M_GND
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
CN102
(SEE PAGE 4-22)
9P
1
SOO
2
GND
3
SCO
4
SIO
5
XIFBUSY
6
XIFCS
7
3.3V_MNT
8
XFRRST
9
GND
MB-103 BOARD (6/8)
CN101
(SEE PAGE 4-22)
10P
3.3V_MNT
XFRRST
3
XIFBUSY
4
XIFCS
5
SIO
6
SOO
7
SC0
8
GND
9
IFRST
10
PCONT
JL431
JL432
(SEE PAGE 4-32)
DOWNLOAD
(JIG)
• Waveforms
DIG13
DIG12
JL433
B+
JL466
JL465
DIG9
DIG11
JL464
JL463
DIG8
DIG7
DIG6
DIG5
DIG4
DIG10
JL462
JL461
JL460
JL459
JL458
DIG3
DIG2
3.5
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
-28.8
R421
2700
CN406
JL434
JL435
JL436
R433
10k
R426
3900
JL457
D413
SLR-342DCT32
JL456
JL453
PROGRESSIVE
C428
22u
25V
JL454
F
JL455
DIG1
B+
R488
220
C426
22u
25V
EVER+3.3V
C437
0.01u
B+
EVER +3.3V
GND
3
2
JL430
100
R474
100
1.8
B+
3.4
VIN
R485
2
AU+11V
4
1
+1.8V REG
3
5
CN405
JL424
IC403
AI+5V
CN404
R416 1800
JL408
SW-13V
6
CN403
JL420
C407
0.01u
-11.5
7P
7
0.2
JL437
5P
1 IC404 3
1
GND
2
EVER +3.3
3
CURSOR
4
N.C
5
N.C
PUSH
ENTER
CURSOR
STICK
-28.8
JL442
3.4
J
JL443
3.4
3.4
SEG3
/SC
SEG2
-15.2/-17.9
SEG1
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
BUZ
N.C
N.C
N.C
/AMUTE
N.C
/VMUTE
N.C
SEL1
SEL0
BUSY
PCONT
STATUS
R401
4700
2.7
0
JL445
3.5
3.5
3.5
JL444
S412
0
R473
10k
R471
10k
-25.7
-20.3
-12.2
-31.2
-31.2
-31.2
F2
F2
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
61 62
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
SEG15
SEG16
SEG17
SEG18
3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz)
JL474 SEG11
JL476
SEG9
JL477
SEG8
JL478
SEG7
JL479
SEG6
JL480
SEG5
JL481
SEG4
JL482
SEG3
JL483
SEG2
JL484
SEG1
2
IC405
RESET
IC406
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
3
R496
47
JL452
JL451
2
JL450
C441
47u
25V
JL449
1
2.9
B+
R446
100k
R497
100k
C440
0.01u
2 ND401 1, 2
IC405
S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2
IC406
GP1UD28SYK
3
2
1
3.5
C421
0.001u
JL448
JL447
EVER +3.3V
L401
47uH
3
-0.2
-12.5
R417
3900
C419
220u
25V
-31.5
B+
C432
0.01u
P17
P18
G13
G5
G12
DIG13
DIG12
DIG11
DIG10
DIG9
DIG8
DIG7
DIG6
DIG5
DIG4
DIG3
JL473 SEG12
JL475 SEG10
-28.4
DIG2
DIG1
JL472 SEG13
Q401
2SC5053T100Q
R489
100k
C420
0.01u
G11
G4
G8
G3
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
B-
Q401,402
DC/DC
CONVERTER
C417
0.01u
-12.5
-0.2
Q402
2SC5053T100Q
D405
MA113-(TX)
T401
DC/DC
CONVERTER
-12.2
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
BZ401
(BUZZER)
G10
G2
G7
G1
9
G9
F1
8
G6
F1
DIG12
DIG13
DIG11
DIG10
DIG9
DIG8
DIG7
DIG6
DIG5
DIG4
SEG4
SO
R440
10k
K
DIG3
DIG2
N.C
1
SI
7
D406
MA113-(TX)
2
10
3
1
4
7
6
8
5
9
C425
22u
50V
D403
MA113-(TX)
D404
MA113-(TX)
D412
MA8068-L-TX
JL441
SEG5
/CS
6
VOUT
JL440
R437
120
SEG6
5
3.5
S409
IC404
TMP86CK74AF-1620
2
JL471 SEG14
VCC
S408
SEG7
1
JL470 SEG15
-12.2
-13.2
-13.2
-28.4
GND
S407
N.C
SEG8
IF COM
N.C
JL469 SEG16
3.5
S406
3.1
1.5
3.3
3.4
-28.4/-31.4
IC404
IR
JL468 SEG17
B-
I
SEG9
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
JL439
SELF_CHECK
SEG10
FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE
JL467 SEG18
VKK
JL438
/STOP
VREF
R435
10k
SEG11
-17.7/-20.4
3.5
R414
2700
/RST
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
R431
3900
2.5
2.9
SEG12
-17.4
-22.8
-28.4
R449
10k
R428
8200
R450
10k
SEG13
/FRRST
AVSS
R444
100
SEL2
POWER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
R455
10k
MENU
RETURN
SEG14
PLAY
TOP MENU
VDD
SEG15
O/C
X401
8MHz
TEST
CURSOR
S405
SEG16
-17.7/-23.2
AN6
S404
XOUT
N.c
H
S403
S402
SEG17
JL446
S401
R448
10k
C427
0.01u
XIN
PONCHK
3
SEG18
2
2
VSS
4
*
1.6
0
3.5
0
3.4
3.5
5
1
R430
2700
6
R427
3900
7
R422
8200
8
R434
10k
R423
22k
ND401
3
1
VCC
SURROUND
PROG
S411
9
S410
PICTURE MODE
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
G
DIG1
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
C431
0.1u
8 Vp-p (200 kHz)
C422
0.1u
R490
27k
3 T401 3
L
05
20 Vp-p (409 kHz)
IF CON
IF-92
4-35
4-36
DVP-NS715P
HS12S1U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
– Ref. No.: HS12S1U board; 5,000 series –
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.
: Uses unleaded solder.
HS12S1U BOARD
A
POWER
B
1-468-650-
1
2
3
4
11
5
HS12S1U BOARD
CN101
CN201
A-1
B-4
D101
D103
D110
D211
D212
D213
D221
D311
D312
D313
D511
D611
D612
D621
D622
B-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-4
A-3
A-4
A-4
B-5
B-4
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-5
IC101
IC301
IC411
IC611
A-3
A-3
B-5
A-5
Q211
Q311
Q611
Q621
Q712
B-5
B-4
A-5
A-5
B-5
Power Block
(HS12S1U)
( SWITCHING REGULATOR)
IF-92
(INTERFACE CONTROL)
AV-63
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
MS-81
(LOADING)
MB-103
(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)
SWITCHING REGULATOR
4-37
4-38
HS12S1U
DVP-NS715P
HS12S1U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: HS12S1U board; 5,000 series –
1
• See page 4-37 for printed wiring board.
2
3
4
5
6
HS12S1U BOARD
T101
NO MARK: E-E MODE
A
D213
D1NS4/6
D221
D1NL20U
+ C211
150uF
35V
C213
47uF
35V
R212
47k
+
C221
100uF
35V
D311
D1NS4
B+
B+
+
C151
150pF
2kV
C223
47uF
35V
1.5
S
L311
39uH
P311
1A/125V
B+
C117
1uF
50V
D103
MTZJ7.5
+ C112
47uF
35V
B+
C611
330uF
35V
5.1
5.2 Q311
2SD1768S
B+ SWITCH
+
3.5
G
B–
R311
1k
B+
IC611
SHUNT REG PQ12RF11
I
Q611
3.4
2SC2655
B+ SWITCH
R621
680
+
3.4
B+
O
B+
C613
47uF
35V +
3.6
C413
47uF
35V
G CT
B+
B+
O
+
C
+
IC611
3.5
3.5
I
C313
47uF
35V
4.2
SHUNT REG
IC411
XC6201P352TH
C311 +
150uF
35V
+ C111
10uF
50V
Q621
DTC143ESA
LED DRIVE
3.4
B+
B+
0
C614
47uF +
35V
R711
1.8k
2.6
R622
120
D622
SLR-343MC
B+
R631
2.2k
R622
(SHORT)
D621
SLR-343VC
R633
1.2k
Q712
DTC143ESA
POWER
CONTROL
+
C711
47uF
35V
D621,622
(ON/STANDBY)
C511
100uF
35V
D212
RD33F
D
CN101
2P
F101
2A 125V
D511
D2L20U
L102
18mH
L101
18mH
P511
1.5A/125V
B–
+
+ C513
47uF
35V
L511
10uH
B–
B–
1
C101
0.1uF
275V
AC IN
PC101
TLP421F
D101
S1WBA60
2
C103
100pF
250V
+ C104
100pF
250V
13
R303
2.2k
0
C107
1000pF
250V
E
SHUNT REG
C302 +
10uF
50V
R304
1.2k
4.1
IC301
FG101
R301
68
5.1
IC301
AN1431T
4.1
+ C301
1uF
50V
R305
390
2.5
R306
1.5k
05
FG201
SWITCHING REGULATOR
HS12S1U
4-39
CN201
13P
POWER
B+
IC411
D611
D2S4M
R113
100
C314
22uF
50V
5.9
B+
D110
D1NL20U
SW201
R213
680
+
D612
D1N60
R110
10
R613
220
1/2W
R313
270
IC101
IC101
MIP2E4DMY
L103
303.5
D
45
C
R211
1.5k
B+
D312
D1N60
SWITCH
D313
1SS270A
1
L221
100uH
B
B+
S
D211
S3L20U
+ C110
120uF
200V
8
Q211
2SJ525
B+ SWITCH
11
11
L211
10uH
B+
7
4-40 E
1
POWER
2
P-CONT
3
EVER–13V
4
MGND
5
MGND
6
SW+11V
7
SW+11V
8
SW+3.3V
9
GND
10
GND
11
EVER+3.3V
12
SW+5V
13
EVER+11V
IF-92 BOARD
CN401
(SEE PAGE 4-35)
Pin name
HA17-HA21
HA22
WP
XSACS
AVCC
AVRH
AVSS
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
VCC
SI0
SO0
SC0
SI1
SO1
SC1
SI2
SO2
DSENS
VSS
XRST
XARPRST
RGBSEL
SDA
Pin No.
1-5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
5-1
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
I/O
O
-
O
O
-
O
I
O
O
O
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
O
O
I/O
I2C data input/output
WIDE Select signal output
Not used
Ground
System reset signal output
Serial bus 2 (data output)
Not used
Serial bus 1 (clock output)
Serial bus 2 (data input)
Not used
Serial bus 1 (data output)
Serial bus 0 (data output)
Serial bus 0 (clock output)
Power supply (+3.3 V)
Serial bus 0 (data input)
Not used
Not used
IF CON Interrupt input
Not used
SDSP Interrupt input
Not used
AV DEC Interrupt input
ARP Interrupt input
Set of mode 2
S101 interrupt
Set of mode 0
Set of mode 1
Reference power supply (+3.3 V)
Ground
Not used
Power supply (+3.3 V)
Not used
I2C EEPROM write protect output
Address bus A17-A21
Function
5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION (MB-103 BOARD IC103)
72
70
71
68
69
66
67
64
65
62
63
60
61
58
59
56
57
54
55
52
53
50
51
48
49
46
47
44
45
42
43
40
41
39
Pin No.
XWRL
XRD
XWRH
BGRNTX
BRQ
CS7X
XWAIT
VCCI
CS6X
CS4X
CS5X
CS2X
CS3X
CS0X
CS1X
CKSW1
OCSW1
X2
VCC
VSS
X1
DACK1
XIFCS
XDRVMUTE
DREQ1
DREQ0
DACK0
MD1
MD2
EXT/DSEL
MD0
TRM+
EUROV
SCL
Pin name
O
O
O
I
I
I
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
I
-
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
-
O
I/O
Lower byte write enable signal output
Read enable signal output
High byte write enable signal output (16 bit and 8 bit)
Test terminal (fixed at “H”)
Test terminal (fixed at “L”)
Not used
Wait signal input
Power supply (+1.8 V)
Not used
ARP Chip select signal output
SDSP Chip select signal output
AV DEC Chip select signal output
AV DEC Chip select signal output
External ROM chip select signal output
Extranal RAM chip select signal output
Not used
Not used
Clock input (16.5 MHz)
Power supply (+3.3 V)
Ground
Clock output (16.5 MHz)
AV DEC DMA-ACK 1 output
IF CON Chip select signal output
Drive mute signal output
AV DEC DMA-REQ 1 input
AV DEC DMA-REQ 0 input
AV DEC DMA-ACK 0 output
Input of mode select 1 (fixed at “ L”)
Input of mode select 2 (fixed at “ L”)
I/P select signal output
Input of mode select 0 (fixed at “ H”)
Not used
Not used
I2C clock output
Function
SECTION 5
IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
DVP-NS715P
5-2 E
Pin name
NMIX
VCCI
VSS
XFRRST
CPUCK
OCSW2
XDACS
TRM–
48/44.1K
WIDE
MA_MUTE
SRAMWE
HD0-HD7
HD8-HD15
VSS
HA0-HA7
VCC
HA8-HA15
VSS
HA16
Pin No.
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85-92
93-100
101
102-109
110
111-118
119
120
O
O
-
O
-
I/O
-
O
I/O
O
O
O
O
I
O
-
I
I/O
Function
Address bus A16
Address bus A08-A15
Ground
Address bus A00-A07
Power supply (+3.3 V)
Data bus D8-D15 (16 bit) , D0-D7 (8 bit)
Ground
External RAM write enable signal output
Data bus D0-D7 (16 bit only)
Laser diode mute signal output
Audio mute signal output
Not used
PLL FS control signal output
Not used
DAC (2ch) chip select signal output
IF CON Reset signal input
CPU clock signal output
Power supply (+1.8 V)
Ground
Not used (fixed at “H”)
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 6
TEST MODE
6-1.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6-3.
The Test Mode allows you to make diagnosis and adjustment easily using the remote commander and monitor TV. The instructions,
diagnostic results, etc. are given on the on-screen display (OSD).
6-2.
The same contents as board detail check by serial interface can be
checked from the remote commander.
On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [0] key on the remote commander, and the following check menu will be displayed.
STARTING TEST MODE
Press the [TOP MENU], [CLEAR], [POWER] keys on the remote
commander in this order with the power of main unit in OFF status, and the Test Mode starts, then “DIAG START” will be displayed on the fluorescent display tube and the menu shown below
will be displayed on the TV screen. At the bottom of menu screen,
the model name and revision number are displayed. Last Off at
the lower right of screen indicates the information code concerning the last power off.
To execute each function, select the desired menu and press its
number on the remote commander.
To exit from the Test Mode, press the [I/ 1] key.
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
_
Quit the Syscon Diagnosis and return to the Test Mode Menu.
Syscon Diagnosis
Drive Auto Adjustment
Drive Manual Operation
Mecha Aging
Emargency Hisory
Version Information
Video Level Adjustment
Exit: Power Key
_
Model:DPX-16xxxx
Revision:x.xxx
1. All
All items continuous check
This menu checks all diagnostic items continuously. Normally, all
items are checked successively one after another automatically
unless an error is found, but at a certain item that requires judgment through a visual check to the result, the following screen is
displayed for the key entry.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
Last Off: xx
Diag All Check
No. 2 Version
Power Off Information Code List
00 :
01 :
02 :
03 :
04 :
05 :
06 :
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
Check Menu
Quit
All
Version
Peripheral
Servo
Supply
AV Decoder
Video
Audio
0. Quit
Test Mode Menu
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SYSCON DIAGNOSIS
2-3. ROM Check Sum
Check Sum = xxxx
Primary Power Off
Power Off Request from SYSTEM CONTROL
Power Off by Emergency Power Off Command from SYSTEM CONTROL
(if information is sent from SYSTEM CONTROL)
IF CON Judged that SYSTEM CONTROL is Faulty
Power Off from Diagnosis Mode of IF CON
Forced Power Off by the User
Power Off by Power Supply Voltage Monitor
Press NEXT Key to Continue
Press PREV Key to Repeat
_
For the ROM Check, the check sum calculated by the Syscon is
output, and therefore you must compare it with the specified value
for confirmation.
Following the message, press > key to go to the next item,
or . key to repeat the same check again. To quit the diagnosis
and return to the Check Menu screen, press x or [ENTER] key.
If an error occurred, the diagnosis is suspended and the error code
is displayed as shown below.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
3-3. EEPROM Check
Error 03: EEPROM Write/Reed N
Address
: 00000001
Write Data : 2492
Read Data : 2490
Press NEXT Key to Continue
Press PREV Key to Repeat
_
Press x key to quit the diagnosis, or . key to repeat the same
item where an error occurred, or > key to continue the check
from the item next to faulty item.
6-1
Submenu
(2-6) Mount resistance confirmation check
Error 22: region code discord
Accordance between region codes, one is detected with
model resistance and destination resistance, and the other
is detected with region resistance, is check.
If an error is detected, the region code determined with region resistance is displayed at “write data” and the region
code determined with model resistance and destination resistance is displayed at “read data”.
Selecting 2 and subsequent items calls the submenu screen of each
item.
Indication of “–” in the submenu means the check is not supported
with the model.
For example, if “5. Supply” is selected, the following submenu
will be displayed.
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
_
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
Check Menu
No. 5 Supply
Quit
All
ARP Register Check
ARP to RAM Data Bus
ARP to RAM Address Bus
ARP RAM Check
3. Peripheral
(3-2) EEPROM Check
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord
0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the address 0x00
to 0xFF of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they
are written to restore the contents of EEPROM.
(3-6) Venc Check
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 52: write and read data discord.
Accessing to the SYSCON may be defective.
0. Quit
Quit the submenu and return to the main menu.
(3-8) External RAM Check
Test data write → read, and accord check
Error 02: External RAM used for SYSCON is checked.
1. All
All submenu items continuous check.
This menu checks 2 and subsequent items successively. At the item
where visual check is required for judgment or an error occurred,
the checking is suspended and the message is output for key entry.
Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found.
Selecting 2 and subsequent items executes respective menus and
outputs the results.
For the contents of each submenu, see “General Description of
Checking Method” and “Check Items List”.
4. Servo
(4-2) Servo DSP Check
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 12: Read data discord
0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the RAM address 0x602 of the Servo DSP and then read for checking.
Also, OPT type “1 LASER” or “2 LASER” is displayed.
(4-3) Check is not supported.
General Description of Checking Method
(4-4) RF Amp Register Check
Date write → read and accord check
Error 13: RF Amp resister write, and read data discord.
After 0x01 is shifted to register which can read and write
RF Amp for 8 bit operation, if write and read data are discord once, the check is performed unsuccessfully.
There may be a single piece of hardware is defective,
mounted imperfect or not mounted.
2. Version
(2-2) Revision
ROM revision number is displayed.
Error: Not detected.
The revision number defined in the source file of ROM
(IC106 or 107) is displayed with four digits.
(2-3) ROM Check Sum
Check sum is calculated.
Error: Not detected.
8-bit data are added up to the ROM (IC106 or 107) address
0x000F0000 to 0x002EFFFF, and the result is displayed
with 4-digit hexadecimal number. Error is not detected.
Compare the result with the specified value.
(2-4) Model Type
Model code is displayed.
Error: Not detected.
The model code read from the EEPROM is displayed with
2-digit hexadecimal number.
(2-5) Region
Region code is displayed.
Error: Not detected.
The region code determined from the model code is displayed.
6-2
5. Supply
(5-5) ARP RAM Check
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 11: ARP RAM read data discord
The program code data stored in ROM are copied to all
areas of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC301)
through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. If the detail check was selected initially, the data are
written to all areas and read, then the same test is conducted
once again with the data where all bits are inverted between
1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data,
and read data are displayed following the error code 11,
and the test is suspended.
(5-2) ARP Register Check
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 08: ARP register write, and read data discord
Data 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the ARP TMAX
register (address 0xC6) and then read for checking.
(5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error
Data 0x0001 to 0x8000 where one bit each is set to 1 are
written to the address 0 of RAM (IC303) connected to the
ARP (IC301) through the bus, then they are read and
checked. In case of discord, written bit pattern and read
data are displayed. If data where multiple bits are 1 are
read, the bits concerned may touch each other. Further, if
data where certain bit is always 1 or 0 regardless of written
data, the line could be disconnected or shorted.
6. AV Decoder
(6-2) 1935 RAM
Data write → read, and accord check
Error 14: AVD RAM read data discord
The program code data stored in ROM (IC106 or 107) are
copied to all areas of RAM (IC404, IC406) connected to
the AVD (IC403) through the bus, then they are read and
checked if they accord. Further, the same test is conducted
once again with the data where all bits are inverted between
1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data,
and read data are displayed following the error code 14,
and the test is suspended.
During the test, OSD display becomes blank as the OSD
area is also checked.
(5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus
Data write → other address read discord check
Error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error
Caution: Address and data display in case of an error is
different from the display of other diagnosis (described later).
Before starting the test, all addresses of RAM (IC303) are
cleared to 0x0000.
First, 0xA55A is written to the address 0x00000, and the
address data are read and checked from addresses 0x00001
to 0x80000 while shifting 1 bit each. Next, the data at that
address is cleared, and it is written to the address 0x00001,
and read and checked in the same manner. This check is
repeated up to the address 0x80000 while shifting the address data by 1 bit each.
If data other than 0 is read at the addresses except written
address, an error is given because all addresses were already cleared to 0. In this check, the error display pattern is
different from that of other diagnosis; read data, written
address, and read address are displayed in this order. However, the message uses same template, and accordingly exchange Address and Data when reading. The following display, for example,
(6-3) 1935 SP
ROM → AVD RAM → Video OUT
Error: Not detected.
The data including sub picture streams in ROM (IC106 or
IC107) are transferred to the RAM (IC404, IC406) in AVD
(IC403), and output as video signals from the AVD (IC403).
Though OSD display becomes blank, the output of video
signals continues until the key is pressed.
They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/
C, Component) except EURO AV terminal.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
5-4. ARP to RAM Address Bus
Error 10: ARP - RAM Address B
Address
: 0000A55A
Write Data : 00000000
Read Data : 00080000
Press NEXT Key to Continue
Press PREV Key to Repeat
_
shows the data 0xA55A was read from address 0x00080000
though it was written to the address 0x00000000. This implies that these addresses are in the form of shadow. Also,
if the read data is not 0xA55A, another error will be present.
6-3
7. Video
Check Items List
(7-2) Color Bar
AVD color bar command write → Video OUT
Error: Not detected.
The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar
signals are output from video terminals.
They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C,
Component) except EURO AV terminal.
2) Version
(2-2) Revision
(2-3) ROM Check Sum
(2-4) Model Type
(2-5) Region
(2-6) M’t Check
8. Audio
3) Peripheral
(3-2) EEPROM Check
(3-6) Venc Check
(3-8) External RAM Check
(8-2) ARP → 1935
Error 15 : ARP → 1935 video NG
16 : ARP → 1935 audio NG
4) Servo
(4-2) Servo DSP Check
(4-3) ––––––– (function not support)
(4-4) RF Amp Register Check
(8-3) Test Tone
Pink noise output
Error: not detected
Test tone is output, from only L and R2 channels of the
model without DD output function, and from Ls and Rs of
two channels of DD model.
After setting all outputs to ON, check for each channel is
performed individually by pressing > to switch the output channel.
5) Supply
(5-2) ARP Register Check
(5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus
(5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus
(5-5) ARP RAM Check
6) AV Decoder
(6-2) 1935 RAM
(6-3) 1935 SP
7) Video
(7-2) Color Bar
8) Audio
(8-2) ARP → 1935
(8-3) Test Tone
Error Codes List
00: Error not detected
01: RAM write/read data discord
02: Gate array NG
03: EEPROM NG
04: Flash memory clear error
05: Flash memory write error
06: Flash memory read data discord
08: ARP register read data discord
09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error
10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error
11: ARP RAM read data discord
12: Servo DSP NG
13: RF Amp NG
14: SDRAM NG
15: ARP → 1935 video NG
16: ARP → 1935 audio NG
1A: System call error (function not supported)
1B: System call error (parameter error)
1C: System call error (illegal ID number)
20: System call error (time out)
22: Resistance incorrect mounting
52: Video Encoder W/R NG
55: External RAM W/R NG
90: Error occurred
91: User verification NG
92: Diagnosis cancelled.
6-4
6-4.
1. DVD-SL (single layer)
Select [1], insert DVD single layer disc, and press [ENTER] key,
and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then
adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.
DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [1] key on the remote commander, and the drive auto adjustment menu will be displayed.
DVD Single Layer Disc Adjustment Steps
## Drive Auto Adjustment ##
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Adjustment Menu
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ALL
DVD-SL
CD
DVD-DL
LCD
Exit: RETURN
Normally, [0] is selected to adjust DVD (single layer), CD, DVD
(dual layer) in this order. But, individual items can be adjusted for
the case where adjustment is suspended due to an error. In this
mode, the adjustment can be made easily through the operation
following the message displayed on the screen. Which disc is currently adjusted is displayed on the fluorescent display tube.
The disc used for adjustment must be the one specified for adjustment.
0. ALL
You will be asked if EEPROM data are initialized or not, and for
this prompt, select [0] and press the [ENTER] key. First , the servo
setting data in EEPROM, Emergency History and Hour Meter are
cleared to initialize. Then, 1. DVD-SL disc, 2. CD disc, and
3. DVD-DL disc are adjusted in this order. Each time one disc was
adjusted, it is ejected, and therefore exchange the disc following
the message. You can exit the adjustment by pressing the x button.
In adjusting each disc, the mirror time is measured to check the
disk type. In the auto adjustment, whether the disc type is correct
is not checked unlike conventional models, and accordingly, take
care not to insert a different type of disc.
6-5
Sled Reset
Disc Check Memory SL
Set Disc Type SL
Spdl Start
LD ON
Focus Error Check
Focus ON 0 with PI Level Musure
Auto Track Offset Adjust L0
Trv Level Check
Tracking ON
CLVA ON
Sled ON
Auto Focus Balance Adjust
Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0
Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0
EQ Boost Adjust
Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
Auto Track Gain Adjust
RF Level Measure
Jitter Measure
Eep Copy Loop Filter Offset
All Servo Stop
2. CD
Select [2], insert CD disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.
3. DVD-DL (dual layer)
Select [3], insert DVD dual layer disc, and press [ENTER] key,
and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then
adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.
CD Adjustment Steps
DVD Dual Layer Disc Adjustment Steps
1. Sled Reset
2. Disc Check Memory CD
3. Set Disc Type CD
4. Spdl Start
5. LD ON
6. Focus Error Check
7. Fcs ON 1 with PI Level Mesure
8. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0
9. Trv Level Check
10. Tracking ON
11. CLVA ON
12. Sled ON
13. Auto focus Blance Adjust
14. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
15. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0
16. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0
17. Eq Boost Adjust
18. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
19. Auto Track Gain Adjust
20. Copy Adjustment Data to LCD
21. RF Level Measure
22. Jitter Measure
23. All Servo Stop
1. Sled Reset
2. Disc Check Memory DL
3. Set Disc Type DL
DVD DL Layer 1 Adjust
4. Spdl Start
5. LD ON
6. Fcs ON 1 with PI Level Mesure
7. Auto Track Offset Adjust L1
8. Tracking ON
9. Clva ON
10. Sled ON
11. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
12. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L1
13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L1
14. Eq Boost Adjust L1
15. Auto Track Gain Adjust L1
16. Jitter Measure
DVD DL Layer 0 Adjust
17. Focus Jump (L1 → L0)
18. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0
19. Tracking ON
20. Clva ON
21. Sled ON
22. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
23. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0
24. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0
25. Eq Boost Adjust L0
26. Auto Track Gain Adjust L0
27. Jitter Measure
28. All Servo Stop
4. LCD (SACD)
No adjustments, because the adjusted data of CD are reflected to
LCD disc and the adjusted data of CD and DVD-DL are reflected
to SACD (hybrid disc).
6-6
6-5.
0.
DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION
Disc Check
On the Test Mode Menu screen, select [2], and the manual operation menu will be displayed. For the manual operation, each servo
on/off control and adjustment can be executed manually.
1. SL Disc Check
2. CD Disc Check
3. DL Disc Check
## Drive Manual Operation ##
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operation Menu
Disc type
Servo Control
Track/Layer Jump
Manual Adjustment
Auto Adjustment
Memory Check
0. Reset SLED TILT
On this screen, the mirror time is measured and written to the
EEPROM to check the disc type. First, set a DVD SL disc and
press [1], then set a CD disc and press [2], and finally set a DVD
DL disc and press [3]. The measured mirror time is displayed respectively.
The adjustment must be executed more than once after default
data were written.
From this screen, you can go to another mode by pressing > or
. key, but you cannot enter this mode from another mode.
You can enter this mode from the Operation Menu screen only.
0. Disc Check Memory
Exit: RETURN
In using the manual operation menu, take care of the following
points. These commands do not provide protection, thus requiring
correct operation. The sector address or time code field is displayed when a disc is loaded.
1. Set correctly the disc type to be used on the Disc Type
screen.
The disc type must be set after a disc was loaded.
The set disc type is cleared when the tray is opened.
2. After power ON, if the Drive Manual Operation was selected, first perform “Reset SLED TILT” by opening 1.
Disc Type screen.
3. In case of an alarm, immediately press the x button to
stop the servo operation, and turn the power OFF.
1.
x
A
[O RETURN]
> , .
[1] to [9], [0]
Cursor ↓ / ↑
Disc Type
Disc Type
Disc Type
1. Disc Type Auto Check
2. DVD SL
12cm
3. DVD DL
12cm
4. CD
12cm
5. SACD
12cm
6. DVD SL
8cm
7. DVD DL
8cm
8. CD
8cm
9. LCD
8cm
0. Reset SLED TILT
Basic operation (controllable from front panel or remote commander)
[I/ 1]
Disc Check Memory
Power OFF
Servo stop
Stop+Eject/Loading
Return to Operation Menu or Test Mode
Menu
Transition between sub modes of menu
Selection of menu items
Increase/Decrease in manually adjusted
value
EMG. 00
On this screen, select the disc type. To select the disc type, press
the number of the loaded disc. The selected disc type is displayed
at the bottom. Selecting [1] automatically selects and displays the
disc type. In case of wrong display, retry “Disc Check Memory”.
Also, opening the tray causes the set disc type to be cleared. In
this case, set the disc type again after loading.
In performing manual operation, the disc type must be set.
Once the disc type has been selected, the sector address or time
code display field will appear as shown below. These values are
displayed when PLL is locked.
Disc Type
1. Disc Type Auto Check
2. DVD SL
12cm
3. DVD DL
12cm
4. CD
12cm
5. SACD
12cm
6. DVD SL
8cm
7. DVD DL
8cm
8. CD
8cm
9. LCD
8cm
0. Reset SLED TILT
SA.------ SI.-- EMG.00
DVD SL 12cm
Display when DVD SL 12cm disc was selected
6-7
Disc Type
Disc Type Auto Check
DVD SL
12cm
DVD DL
12cm
CD
12cm
SACD
12cm
DVD SL
8cm
DVD DL
8cm
CD
8cm
LCD
8cm
Reset SLED TILT
TC. --:--:-- EMG.00
CD
12cm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
[3] Focus
Search the focus and turn on the focus.
[4] TRK
Turn ON/OFF the tracking servo.
[5] Sled
Turn ON/OFF the sled servo.
If PLL is not locked (or can not be
locked), the sled servo does not be
turned ON. (Indication remains as OFF)
[6] CLVA
Turn ON/OFF normal servo of spindle
servo.
[7] FCS. Srch
Apply same voltage as that of focus
search to the focus drive to check the
focus drive system.
→ Sled FWD
Move the sled outward. Perform this
operation with the tracking servo turned
off.
← Sled REV
Move the sled inward. Perform this operation with the tracking servo turned
off.
Display when CD 12cm disc was selected
[0] Reset SLED TILT
[1] Disc Type Check
[2] to [9]
Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial
position.(This model does not have Tilt
device, so reset only the Sled to initial
position.)
Judge automatically the loaded disc. As
the judged result is displayed at the bottom of screen, make sure that it is correct.
If Disc Check Memory menu has not
been executed after EEPROM default
setting, the disc type cannot be judged.
In this case, return to the initial menu
and make a check for three types of
discs (SL, DL, CD).
3. Track/Layer Jump
Tracking/Layer Jump
1Tj FWD
R. Fj (L1 → L0)
1Tj REV
L. Fj (L0 → L1)
2Tj FWD
U. Lj (L1 → L0)
2Tj REV
D. Lj (L0 → L1)
NTj FWD
NTj REV
500Tj FWD
500Tj REV
10k/20k FWD
10k/20k REV
SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00
DVD SL 12 cm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
Select the loaded disc. The adjusted
value is written to the address of selected disc. No further entry is necessary if [1] was selected.
2. Servo Control
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Servo Control
LD
Off R. Sled FWD
SP
Off L. Sled REV
Focus
Off
TRK.
Off
Sled
Off
CLVA
Off
FCS. Srch Off
On this screen, track jump, etc. can be performed. Only for the
DVD-DL, the focus jump and layer jump are displayed in the right
field.
[1] 1Tj FWD
1-track jump forward.
[2] 1Tj REV
1-track jump reverse.
[3] 2Tj FWD
2-track jump forward.
[4] 2Tj REV
2-track jump reverse.
On this screen, the servo on/off control necessary for replay is
executed. Normally, turn on each servo from 1 sequentially and
when CLVA is turned on, the usual trace mode becomes active. In
the trace mode, DVD sector address or CD time code is displayed.
This is not displayed where the spindle is not locked.
The spindle could run overriding the control if the spindle system
is faulty or RF is not present. In such a case, do not operate CLVA.
[5] NTj FWD
N-track jump forward.
[6] NTj REV
N-track jump reverse.
[7] 500Tj FWD
Fine search forward.
[8] 500Tj REV
Fine search reverse.
[0] Reset SLED TILT
[9] 10k/20k FWD
Direct search forward.
[0] 10k/20k REV
Direct search reverse.
0. Reset SLED TILT
SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00
DVD SL 12 cm
Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial
position.(This model does not have Tilt
device, so reset only the Sled to initial
position.)
– The following commands are valid for DVD-DL disc only –
[1] LD
Turn ON/OFF the laser.
[2] SP
Turn ON/OFF the spindle.
→ Fj (L1 → L0)
6-8
Focus jump forward.
(Trk/Sled Servo OFF)
← Fj (L0 → L1)
Focus jump reverse.
(Trk/Sled Servo OFF)
↑ Lj (L1 → L0)
Layer jump forward.
(Trk/Sled Servo ON)
↓ Lj (L0 → L1)
Layer jump reverse.
(Trk/Sled Servo ON)
5. Auto Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
4. Manual Adjustment
Manual Adjustment:Up/Down
1. TRK. Offset
2. Focus Gain
3. TRK. Gain
4. Focus Offset
5. Focus Balance
6. L.F. Offset
7. Analog FRSW
8. PLL Dac Gain
9. EQ BOOST
0. GD ADJ
Adjustment: Up/Down
SA. ------ SI. -- EMG. 00
DVD SL 12cm
Jitter FF
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto Adjustment
TRK. Offset
Focus Balance
Focus Offset
Focus Gain
TRK. Gain
EQ
L.F. Offset
Group Delay
SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00
DVD SL 12 cm
On this screen, each item can be adjusted automatically. Select the
desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and selected item is adjusted automatically.
[1] Auto TRK. Offset
Adjusts tracking offset.
[2] Auto Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance.
On this screen, each item can be adjusted manually. Select the
desired number [1] to [0] from the remote commander, and current setting for the selected item will be displayed, then increase
or decrease numeric value with ↑ key or ↓ key. This value is
stored in the EEPROM. If CLV has been applied, the jitter is displayed for reference for the adjustment.
[3] Auto Focus Offset
Adjusts focus offset.
[4] Auto Focus Gain
Adjusts focus gain.
[5] Auto TRK. Gain
Adjusts track gain.
[6] Auto EQ
[7] Auto L.F. Offset
Adjusts loop filter offset.
[1] TRK. Offset
Adjusts tracking offset.
[2] Focus Gain
Adjusts focus gain.
[3] TRK. Gain
Adjusts track gain.
6. Memory Check
[4] Focus Offset
Adjusts focus offset.
[5] Focus Balance
Display images are shown as follows, and all three screens are
able to switch.
Adjusts focus balance.
[6] L.F. Offset
Adjusts loop filter offset.
[7] Analog FRSW
[8] PLL Dac Gain
Sets the shifting switch for analog feedback circuit.
Adjusts PLL D/A converter gain.
[9] EQ BOOST
Adjusts amount of boost of equalizer.
[0] GD ADJ
Adjusts amount of group delay
[8] Auto Group Delay
EEPROM DATA 1
CD
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
LCD
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Focus Gain
TRK. Gain
FCS Balnce
Focus Bias
TRV Offset
L.F. Offset
EQ. Boost
_
UP
: Last Data
DOWN : Next Data
CLEAR : Default Set
EEPROM DATA 2
CD
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
LCD
-----xx
--
RF Jitter
RF Level
FE Level
FE Balance
TRV.Level
TE Gain
PI Level
_
UP
: PREV Data
DOWN : Next Data
CLEAR : Default Set
6-9
-–
SL
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
DL -–
L0 L1
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
page.1/3
-–
SL
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
-xx
DL -–
L0 L1
xx xx
-- --- --- --- --- -xx --
page.2/3
EEPROM DATA 3
CD
Analog FRSW
xx
PLL Dac Gain xx
Mirror Time
xx
_ THR
UP
:
DOWN :
CLEAR :
LCD
xx
xx
xx
A&L
xx xx
PREV Data
First Data
Default Set
-–
SL
xx
xx
xx
6-7.
DL -–
L0 L1
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx/xx xx
EMERGENCY HISTORY
### EMG. History ###
Laser Hours
CD
DVD
xxhxxm
xxhxxm
xx
1. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
page.3/3
2. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Select: 1-9
(1: Last EMG.)
On this screen, current servo adjusted data stored in the EEPROM
are displayed. The adjusted data are initialized by pressing the
[CLEAR] key, but be careful that they are not recoverable after
initialization.
Before clearing the adjusted data, make a note of the set data. This
screen will also appear if [0] All is selected in the Drive Auto
Adjustment. In this case, default setting cannot be made.
Data of “THR A & L” on page 3/3 can not be changed if default
set is done.
Scroll: UP/DOWN
Exit: RETURN
On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [4] displays the information such as servo emergency history. The history information
from last 1 up to 10 can be scrolled with ↑ key or ↓ key. Also,
specific information can be displayed by directly entering that
number with ten keys.
The upper two lines display the laser ON total hours. Data below
minutes are omitted.
6-6. MECHA AGING
Clearing History Information
Clearing laser hours
Press [DISPLAY] and [CLEAR] keys in this order.
Both CD and DVD data are cleared.
Clearing emergency history
Press [TOP MENU] and [CLEAR] keys in this order.
Initializing set up data
Press [MENU] and [CLEAR] keys in this order.
The data have been initialized when “Set Up Initialized” message is displayed. The EMG. History screen will be restored
soon.
### Mecha Aging ###
Press OPEN key
Abort: STOP key
On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [3] executes the aging
of mechanism. First, open the tray and load a disc. Press
the H key, and the aging will start. During aging, the repeat cycle
is displayed. Aging can be aborted at any time by pressing
the x key. After the operation has stopped, unload the disc and
press again the x key or the [O RETURN] key to return to the
Test Mode Menu.
6-10
6-8.
VERSION INFORMATION
6-10. IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
1. IF-92 BOARD (IF CON) TEST MODE
### Version Infomation ###
IF con.
Ver.x.xxx(xxxx)
Group
xx
SYScon.
Ver.x.xxx(xxxx)
Model
xx
Region
0x
The front board test mode is the IF CON self diagnostic mode.
The IF CON can diagnose the functions of the front panel boards
that the IF CON controls. Normally, the IF CON makes a serial
communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL and operates following the commands from the SYSTEM CONTROL, but in the
Test mode, the IF CON operates independently from the SYSTEM CONTROL.
Servo DSP Ver: x.xxx
AVD ucode Ver: xxxxxxxx
OPT TYPE : x LASER
Exit : RETURN
In the Test mode, the following functions can be checked.
1. Button function
2. Remote commander receiving function
3. SYSTEM CONTROL-IF CON serial communication
4. Click shuttle function
5. Fluorescent display tube lighting check
Grid check
Anode check
6. LED control function
The ROM version, region code, OPT type, etc. are displayed if
[5] is selected in the Test Mode Menu.
The parenthesized hexadecimal number in the version number field
indicates the checksum value of the ROM.
Note : After down loading ROM data, sometimes it happens that
checksum is not the same as that of ROM data which has
been down loaded. In such a case, go back to the menu
and select “0. Syscon Diagnosis”, then select “1. All” in
“2. Version”. If the result of this operation does not give
an agreement, it must be either Down Load error or ROM
error.
6-9.
In the Test mode, the set operates same as usual, except voltage
monitoring, communication monitoring, display of fluorescent
display tube, and LED control.
1. The routine that monitors +3.3 V (P-CONT) of MB-103 board
is not provided.
2. The monitoring timer for serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL is not provided. The set is not placed in the
Standby mode, even if the communication with SYSTEM
CONTROL is normal.
3. Display of fluorescent display tube (normally, display is made
following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)
4. LED control (normally, control is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)
VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [6] displays color bars
for video level adjustment. During display of color bars, OSD disappears but the menu screen will be restored if pressing any key.
2. OPERATION OF SELF CHECK MODE
The Self Check mode is the function to conduct the basic test to
the FL display and DVD panel section.
2-1. Self Check Mode Transition Processing
At the AC Power ON after IF CON (IC404) was reset, the input to
10pin (SELF CHECK) is judged and if “Low” is entered, the main
unit transits to the Self Check mode. In this port input judgment,
the result of 3-time attempts must be same (assuming that the MB103 and AV-63 boards are not connected). While pressing the x key
on the main unit with the IF CON in STANDBY mode, enter
[ O RETURN] → [DISPLAY] (or [SET UP]) on the remote commander, and the unit transits to the Self Check Mode. The Self
Check mode terminates when the IF CON transits to the STANDBY
mode.
6-11
2-2. Operation of Auto Self Check
When the Self Check mode becomes active at the AC Power ON
or by key input, the test display of the following steps (1) to (4) is
repeated.
(1) FLD and LED all ON (for 5 seconds)
VCD
;Digital
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
(2) MODEL display (for 2 seconds)
;Digital
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
VCD
(3) Version display (for 2 seconds)
;Digital
VCD
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
(4) ROM creation date display (for 2 seconds)
;Digital
VCD
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
6-12
MIN
SEC
2-3. Each Self Check Function
Each Self Check function tests the FLD display, LED display, and
key input.
IC404: Pin No. (Signal)
Pin eg (PLAY) Pin eh (DISPLAY) Pin ej (POWER)
Input
Voltage [V]
Pin ed (CURSOR)
Pin ef (O/C)
0 – 0.2
ENTER
OPNE/CLOSE
PLAY
STOP
POWER
0.6 – 0.82
DOWN
PREVIOUS
–
DISPLAY
TVS
1.16 – 1.47
LEFT
PAUSE
–
MENU
PVEQ
1.8 – 2.12
UP
NEXT
–
RETURN
–
2.48 – 2.7
RIGHT
–
–
TOP MENU
–
3.3
–
–
–
–
–
2-3-1. FLD and LED All ON
2-3-1-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• x key and A key on the main unit
• ← key on the main unit and the remote commander
2-3-1-2. Operation and Display
In this mode, all LEDs except STANDBY LED and all segments
of FLD turn ON.
Example of FLD all ON
VCD
;Digital
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
2-3-2. Main Unit Key Name Display and Key Code Display
2-3-2-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• Keys on main unit except keys transited in self check
2-3-2-2. Operation and Display
When a key on the main unit is pressed in the Self Check mode,
the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name
display and the key code display can be switched with the
[DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD
segments turn on when a communication error occurred.
FLD display (at input of H key on the main unit)
;Digital
VCD
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
6-13
Key code display (at input of H key, Key code: 0Ah)
;Digital
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
VCD
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
At input of faulty voltage
;Digital
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
VCD
When two keys are pressed
;Digital
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
VCD
2-3-3. Remote Commander Key Name Display and Key
Code Display
2-3-3-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• Remote commander keys except keys transited in self check
2-3-3-2. Operation and Display
When a key on the remote commander is pressed in the Self Check
mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key
name display and the key code display can be switched with the
[DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD
segments turn on when a communication error occurred.
Remote commander key name display (at input of X key)
;Digital
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
VCD
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
Remote commander key code display (at input of X key, Key code: 39h)
;Digital
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
VCD
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
6-14
2-3-4. Communication Monitoring Display
The communication state is monitored and displayed while the
key name on the main unit and the remote commander is displayed.
When the communication to the System Controller failed, VIDEO
CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on.
Communication error display (at no key input)
;Digital
VCD
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
Communication error display (at code display without input of
the remote commander)
;Digital
VCD
MULTI
PROGRESSIVE
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
2-3-5. FLD Anode Test Display and SHUTTLE Click
Operation Test
2-3-5-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• → on the main unit and the remote commander
• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Anode Test display
(This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore
use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/
SHUTTLE)
2-3-5-2. Operation and Display
The Self Check mode transits to this mode when → key is entered. Only the first segment of each grid of FLD turns on, and
each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the segment of each grid is
switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the segment switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it
switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direction. This tests whether each segment
turns on individually.
Display at the start of Anode Test
VCD
;Digital
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
↓
;Digital
VCD
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
(Input in CW direction)
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
6-15
2-3-6. FLD Grid Test Display and SHUTTLE Click
Operation Test
2-3-6-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• ↑ on the main unit and the remote commander
• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Grid Test display
(This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore
use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/
SHUTTLE)
2-3-6-2. Operation and Display
The Self Check mode transits to this mode when ↑ key is entered. The first grid of FLD all turns on and other grids turn off.
Each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the grid is switched in order.
When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the grid switches in 1 → 2
→ 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direction. This tests whether each grid turns on individually.
Display at the start of Grid Test
;Digital
VCD
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
↓
;Digital
VCD
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
MIN
SEC
(Input in CW direction)
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
2-3-7. LED Test Display
2-3-7-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• ↓ on the main unit and the remote commander
• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during LED Test display
(This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore
use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/
SHUTTLE)
2-3-7-2. Operation and Display
LED is switched in order by the input of JOG/SHUTTLE. Also,
LED ON/OFF is switched by the input of same key as the function
that turns on the LED concerned.
FLD display during LED Test
VCD
;Digital
DVD PROGRESSIVE MULTI
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE
PGM A- B
GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
2-3-8. Beep Sound Test
2-3-8-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• Input of a key on main unit
2-3-8-2. Operation and Display
In the Self Check mode, each time a key on the main unit is entered, a beep sound of 1kHz (100ms) is generated.
6-16
10G
11G
12G
13G
9G
8G
7G
6G
5G
4G
3G
;Digital GROUP TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX ANGLE NTSC HOUR
VCD
PROGRESSIVE
MULTI
DVD
MP 3 REPEAT 1
CD SHUFFLE PGM A- B
2G
MIN
1G
SEC
a
f
j
h
g
e
b
k
s
n
r
col
m
c
p
Dp
d
( 12G~1G )
ANODE CONNECTION
12G
11G
10G
9G
8G
7G
6G
5G
4G
3G
2G
1G
P1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
P2
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
P3
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
13G
P4
; Digital
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
P5
PROGRESSIVE
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
P6
P7
MULTI
P8
P9
MP 3
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
P10
REPEAT
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
P11
1
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
P12
SHUFFLE
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
P13
PGM
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
P14
A-
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
P15
B
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
P16
VCD
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
-
P17
DVD
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
col
-
col
-
-
P18
CD
TRACK
CHAP
INDEX
ANGLE
NTSC
HOUR
-
MIN
-
SEC
GROUP TITLE
6-17
1-3. Clock signal check
Measure the clock signal frequency at CPUCK (CL101) of
SYSCON (IC104) with an oscilloscope.
If the 8.25 MHz signal appears. t Check the machine according to section 1-3-1
If the 33 MHz signal appears. t Check the machine according to section 1-3-2.
If other frequencies are output.
R110 and R113 have defective soldering, X101 crystal oscillator is defective.
If the measurement point is fixed to either “H” or “L”. t
Observe XFRRST (pin-uh) of SYSCON (IC104) with an
oscilloscope.
If the measurement point is “L”, check the following items.
If the IC has defective soldering, if the IC is short-circuited.
If the measurement point is “H”,
t Component X101 or SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
6-11. TROUBLESHOOTING
6-11-1. Cannot Enter Test Mode
You cannot enter the Test mode when either button has been pressed
by any reason with the board assembled in the front panel. In this
state, the power does not turn on even under normal condition (the
unit is kept in standby state), and also no button is active and the
remote commander is not accepted. In this case, disconnect the
MB-103 board and AV-63 board, and with the SELF CHECK (pin
0) of IF CON (IC404) on the IF-92 board kept in low state, supply AC, and the IF CON self-diagnosis mode will be forcibly activated. The IF CON (IC404) checks the SELF CHECK port only
after the power on reset (only at AC supply, not in standby state).
If any button is pressed, its name is displayed on the fluorescent
display tube. But, if other than “NOTHING” is displayed though
no button is pressed, it means that any button has been pressed.
6-11-2. Faults in Test Mode (MB-103 board)
1. The test mode menu is not displayed.
1-1. Board visual check
Check that the ICs of SYSCON (IC104), ROM (IC106 or
IC107), AVD (IC403), ARP & SERVO (IC301) are working
correctly.
Check that outside appearance of the ICs is normal.
Check that IC pins are not short-circuited.
Check that there is no soldering error.
Check that outside appearance of the capacitors and resistors
is normal.
1-3-1. When the 8.25 MHz signal appears at CPUCK
• Check the XRD, XWRH and CS0X signal.
Observe XRD (pin-u;), XWRH (pin-ua), and CS0X (pin-tk)
of SYSCON (IC104) with an oscilloscope.
If these pins are fixed to either “L” (0V) or “H” (3.3V), or if
these pins stay in the center voltage, check the followings.
Check if the signal line does not have the defective soldering.
Check if the signal line is short-circuited with other signal
lines.
If you cannot find any problem t SYSCON (IC104) is
defective.
• HA [0 to 21] signal and HD [0 to 15] signal check
Observe HA [0 to 21] (pins-<z/x to <z/. , <zzz to <zz, , <zx/ , 1 to 5)
of SYSCON (IC104) and HD [0 to 15] (pins-ig to <z// ) with
an oscilloscope.
If these pins are fixed to either “L” (0V) or “H” (3.3V), or if
the HA pin stays in the center voltage, check the followings.
(HD stays in the center voltage when it is normal.)
t Check if the signal line does not have the defective
soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal line or
SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
• Reset signal check
Check if XFRRST (pin-uh) of SYSCON (IC104) normal or
not.
The signal starts up at the same time as Vcc t Defective
soldering.
1-2. Power supply voltage check
Check the power voltage of the power connector (CN102).
Check the power voltage of SYSCON (IC104).
Check the power voltage of ROM (IC106 or IC107).
Check the power voltage of AVD (IC403).
Check the power voltage of ARP & SERVO (IC301).
If the power voltage has any abnormality t
Check that the power supply lines are not shorted.
Check that there is no soldering error.
If any abnormality cannot be found still t
Check that each IC is working normally.
If the trouble does not apply to any of the above-described phenomenon, SYSCON (IC104) or ROM (IC106 or IC107) is defective.
6-18
1-3-2. When the 33 MHz signal appears at CPUCK
• WAIT signal check
Observe XWAIT (pin-yj) of SYSCON (IC104) with an oscilloscope.
If it is fixed to “L” (0V). t Observe CS2X to CS5X (pinsy; to yd).
If CS2X or CS3X is “L”. t AVD (IC403) has defective soldering or AVD is defective.
If CS4x or CS5X is “L”. t ARP & SERVO (IC301) has
defective soldering or ARP & SERVO is defective.
If any one of the above is not “L”. t XWAIT or CSnX is
short-circuited or has the defective soldering or AVD (IC403)
is defective or ARP & SERVO (IC301) is defective.
Center voltage t The XWAIT line has defective soldering
or is short-circuited or AVD (IC403) is defective or ARP &
SERVO (IC301) is defective or SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
• CSnX signal check
Observe CS0X to CS5X (pins-tk to yd) of SYSCON (IC104)
with an oscilloscope.
If they are fixed to “L” (0V) or if to center voltage t Check
that the ICs do not have the defective soldering or is shortcircuited with the other signal lines or SYSCON (IC104) is
defective.
CS0X: ROM (IC106 or IC107)
CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC403)
CS4X, CS5X: ARP & SERVO (IC301)
3. If the message “SDSP No Ack” appears after the menu
is displayed.
3-1. ARP & SERVO clock signal check
Check frequency of CLKIN (pin-<zb/ )
33 MHz t Normal
Frequency other than 33 MHz t CLKIN is short-circuited
or defective soldering or PLL (IC103) is defective or ARP &
SERVO (IC301) is defective
3-2. ARP & SERVO (IC301) PLL oscillation check
Observe PLCKO (pin-ij) of ARP & SERVO (IC301) with an
oscilloscope.
If the pin is fixed to either “L” (0V) or “H” (3.3V).
If XRST if fixed to “L”. XRST has the defective soldering, In all other cases. ARP & SERVO (IC301) is defective
If it is oscillating.
HA [0 to 7] are HD [8 to 15] are short-circuited, check
XSDSPIT and XSDSPCS or ARP & SERVO (IC301) is
defective.
4. If trouble occurs at the specific item of the “Diag All
Check”.
IC mount of the NG item is defective or IC is defective.
5. Picture and audio are not output.
Check connection of CN601
Check for the defective connection of flat cable and check of
damage of the flat cable.
If the trouble symptom does not apply to any of the above phenomenon, SYSCON (IC104) or ROM (IC106 or IC107) is defective.
6. Picture is output but audio is not output.
Check the audio data output (at pins-wf, wk, and wl) of AVD
(IC403)
The audio data is not output. t AVD (IC403) or audio
DAC (IC601) mount is defective or power supply is defective or AVD (IC403) or audio DAC (IC601) is defective.
PLL (IC103) 512fs output check
If the frequency or waveform has abnormality. t The signal line has defective soldering or the signal line is shortcircuited with other signal lines or PLL (IC103) is defective.
2. Test mode menu is displayed but the machine stops
when menu is selected
2-1. AVD (IC403) check
Observe SDCLKO (pin-<zxm ) of AVD (IC403) with an oscilloscope.
95 MHz t No problem
27 MHz t Observe the XRST, HA, HD, XRD, XWRH INT
and CS signal waveform at the respective pins of AVDEC,
AVD (IC403) is defective.
If the signal is other than the above frequencies t AVD
(IC403) 27MHz signal line (CLKI (pin-<zb, ), SCLKIN (pin<zn/ )) is short-circuited, IC mount is defective, AVD (IC403) is
defective, PLL (IC103) is defective.
7. Audio is output but picture is not output.
Observe pins-ej, ek, el, rs, rd and rf of VDAC (IC504)
with an oscilloscope.
If the analog signal is not output. t The signal line has the
defective soldering or is short-circuited or parts are defective
or VDAC (IC504) is defective.
2-2. INT signal check
Observe INT0 to 2 (pins-qh to qk) of SYSCON (IC104) with
an oscilloscope.
If they are fixed to “L” (0V) or fixed to the center voltage t
Check that the ICs do not have the defective soldering, or are
short-circuited, SYSCON (IC104) is defective, or the following ICs are not defective.
INT0: AVD (IC403)
INT1, INT2: ARP & SERVO (IC301)
6-11-3. Drive Auto Adjustment stops due to error.
The ARP & SERVO (IC301) analog circuit of MB-103 board is
defective or RF-Amp (IC201) or M-Driver (IC202) peripheral circuit is defective or optical pickup block is defective or flat cable
connection is defective
2-3. If any abnormality cannot be confirmed by the
above-described checks, check the CS signal that
is currently output.
The CS signal other than CS0X is being output. t IC mount
is defective or the IC is defective depending on the moving
CS signal.
CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC403)
CS4X, CS5X: ARP & SERVO (IC301)
If the trouble is not applicable to any of the above phenomenon,
SYSCON (IC104) or ROM (IC106 or IC107) is defective.
6-19
6-11-4. The product itself is defective.
• If MB103 does not have any problem,
The board other than MB-103 board is defective or connection is defective or optical pickup block is defective or mechanism deck is defective
1. Power LED does not light in Red when the AC power
is turned on.
Check the EVER –13V (pin-3), EVER+3.3V (pin-qa),
EVER+11V (pin-qd) voltage of the power supply block
CN201.
If voltage is abnormal. t The power supply block is defective.
2. Power LED does not light in green after transmitting
the POWER on command. It remains lighting in red (in
the STANDBY mode).
2-1. Check the EVER -13V (pin-3), EVER+3.3V (pin-qa),
EVER+11V (pin-qd) voltage at CN201 of the power
supply block/
If voltage is abnormal. t The power supply block is defective.
2-2. Check if the fuse on the IF board has blown of not.
If the fuse has blown t Replace the fuse.
2-3. Check the P-CONT (pin-2) at CN401 of the IF-92
board when the POWER button is pressed.
If it remains at “L”,
t The signal line has the defective soldering or it is shortcircuited with other signal lines or capacitor or resistor is defective or IFCON is defective or connection between the power
supply block and the IF-92 board is defective, or connector
installation is defective, or the power supply block is defective.
3-3. Check IFBSY (pin-5), XIFCS (pin-6), SI0 (pin-4),
SO0 (pin-1) and SC0 (pin-3) at CN101
If they are fixed to “H” or “L”.
t The signal line has defective soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal line, or parts are defective, or
SYSCON (IC104) is defective
If they change between “L/H”.
Connector installation is defective, or the IF-92 board is defective, or SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
If they stay in the center voltage.
Poor connection of flexible wiring board such as it is inserted
in an angle diagonally, or defective soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal line.
3-4. Check PONCHK (pin-e;) of IFCON (IC404) on the
IF-92 board.
If rise-up time from 0.5 V to 1.5 V or more takes longer time,
or it does not exceed 1.5 V or more. t The IF board is defective.
4. The LED lights in green but the FL display does not
light when the POWER button is pressed.
Connection between the power supply block and the IF-92
board is defective, or connector installation is defective, or
the IF-92 board is defective.
5. Both picture and audio are not output.
Connection between the power supply block and the IF-92
board is defective, or connection between the IF-92 board and
the AV-63 board is defective, or connection between the AV63 board and the MB-103 board is defective, or connector
installation is defective, or AV-63 board is defective.
6. Picture is not normal. (Block noise or others appear.)
The MB-103 board AVD (IC403) or SDRAM (IC404, IC405)
is defective, or ARP & SERVO (IC301) is defective.
2-4. Check if the button is kept depressed in the IFCON
self mode.
If the button is kept depressed. t The front panel is defective, or IF-92 board is defective.
2-5. Check PONCHK (pin-e;) of IFCON (IC404) on the IF92 board.
If it is 0.5 V or more. t The power supply is defective, or IF92 board is defective.
3. Power LED becomes red (STANDBY mode) in at once
through Power LED lights in Green once when the
POWER button is pressed.
3-1. Check CN201 voltage of the power supply block
when the LED lights in green.
If voltage is abnormal. t The power supply block is defective, or the IF-92 board is defective, or MB103 is defective
3-2. Check XFRRST (pin-8) at CN101 on the MB-103
board.
If it is fixed to “L”. t The signal line has defective soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal lines, or parts are
defective.
6-20
6-20E
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 7
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
7-1. POWER SUPPLY CHECK
In making adjustment, refer to 7-6. Adjustment
Related Parts Arrangement.
1. HS12S1U Board
Note: During diagnostic check, the characters and color bars can
be seen only with the NTSC monitor. Therefore, for diagnostic check, use the monitor that supports both NTSC and
PAL modes.
Use the reference disc for PAL for check, and use the reference disc for NTSC for adjustment.
Mode
E-E
Instrument
Digital voltmeter
EVER +3.3 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin qa
Specification
3.5 ± 0.2 Vdc
This section describes procedures and instructions necessary for
adjusting electrical circuits in this set.
SW +3.3 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin 8
Instruments required:
1) Color monitor TV
2) Oscilloscope 1 or 2 phenomena, band width over 100 MHz,
with delay mode
3) Frequency counter (over 8 digits)
4) Digital voltmeter
5) Standard commander (RMT-D145A)
6) DVD reference disc
HLX-501 (J-6090-071-A) (dual layer) (NTSC)
HLX-503 (J-6090-069-A) (single layer) (NTSC)
HLX-504 (J-6090-088-A) (single layer) (NTSC)
HLX-505 (J-6090-089-A) (dual layer) (NTSC)
HLX-506 (J-6090-077-A) (single layer) (PAL)
HLX-507 (J-6090-078-A)(dual layer) (PAL)
7) SACD reference disc
HLXA-509 (J-6090-090-A)
8) Extention Cable (J-6090-107-A)
Specification
3.3 ± 0.2 Vdc
+5 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin qs
Specification
5.0 ± 0.3 Vdc
SW +11 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin 6, 7
Specification
11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc
EVER +11 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin qd
Specification
11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc
EVER –13 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin 3
Specification
–13.0 ± 1.0 Vdc
Checking method:
1) Confirm that each voltage satisfies the specification.
! Caution
Never touch the heat sink that is the primary part. It is feared that
you may get an electric shock.
7-1
3. Checking S Video Output S-Y
<Purpose>
Check S-terminal video output. If it is incorrect, pictures will not
be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with a Sterminal cable.
7-2. ADJUSTMENT OF VIDEO SYSTEM
1. Video Level Adjustment (MB-103 BOARD)
<Purpose>
This adjustment is made to satisfy the NTSC standard, and if not
adjusted correctly, the brightness will be too large or small.
Mode
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Color bars
Test point
LINE OUT (VIDEO) connector
(75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Adjusting element
RV501
Specification
1.00
+0.04
–0.02
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Color bars
Test point
S VIDEO OUT (S-Y) connector
(75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Specification
1.00 ± 0.05 Vp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the S-Y level is 1.00 ± 0.05 Vp-p.
Vp-p
Adjusting method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Adjust the RV501 to attain 1.00 +0.04
–0.02 Vp-p.
1.00 ± 0.05 Vp-p
1.00
+0.04
–0.02
Vp-p
Figure 7-3
4. Checking S Video Output S-C
<Purpose>
This checks whether the S-C satisfies the NTSC Standard. If it is
not correct, the colors will be too dark or light.
Figure 7-1
2. Progressive Video Output Level Adjustment
(MB-103 BOARD)
<Purpose>
This adjustments progressive video output. If it is incorrect, correct brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance,
projector.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Color bars
Test point
S VIDEO OUT (S-C) connector
(75 Ω terminated)
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Signal
Color bars
Specification
A = 286 ± 30 mVp-p (NTSC)
Test point
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y)
connector (75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Adjusting element
RV502
Specification
1.00 – 0.02 Vp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the S-C burst is “A”.
+ 0.04
Adjusting method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “7” Prog Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
+ 0.04
2) Adjust the RV502 to attain 1.00 – 0.02 Vp-p
A
Figure 7-4
0.04
1.00 +– 0.02
Vp-p
Figure 7-2
7-2
5. Checking Component Video Output Y
<Purpose>
This checks component video output Y. If it is incorrect, correct
brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance,
projector.
Mode
7. Checking Component Video Output R-Y
<Purpose>
This checks component video output R-Y. If it is incorrect, correct colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance,
projector.
Video level adjustment in test mode
Mode
Signal
Color bars
Signal
Color bars
Test point
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y)
connector (75 Ω terminated)
Test point
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR)
connector (75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Specification
1.00 ± 0.05 Vp-p
Specification
648 ± 50 mVp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the Y level is 1.00 ± 0.05 Vp-p.
Video level adjustment in test mode
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the R-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.
1.00 ± 0.05 Vp-p
648 ± 50 mVp-p
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-7
6. Checking Component Video Output B-Y
<Purpose>
This checks component video output B-Y. If it is incorrect, correct colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance,
projector.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Color bars
Test point
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PB)
connector (75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Oscilloscope
Specification
648 ± 50 mVp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the B-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.
648 ± 50 mVp-p
Figure 7-6
7-3
7-3. ADJUSTMENT RELATED PARTS ARRANGEMENT
MB-103 BOARD (SIDE A)
COMP OUT
RV502
RV501
IC403
CS OUT
HS12S1U BOARD (SIDE A)
13
CN201
7-6 E
1
DVP-NS715P
SECTION 8
REPAIR PARTS LIST
8-1.
EXPLODED VIEWS
NOTE:
• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may
have some difference from the original one.
• Color Indication of Appearance Parts
Example:
KNOB, BALANCE (WHITE) . . . (RED)
↑
↑
Parts Color
Cabinet's Color
The components identified by mark
0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are
seldom required for routine service. Some delay
should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• The mechanical parts with no reference number in
the exploded views are not supplied.
• Accessories and packing materials are given in the
last of the electrical parts list.
8-1-1. FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Les composants identifiés par une
marque 0 sont critiquens pour la
sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
portant le numéro spécifié.
6
5
4
3
not supplied
3
14
4
11
12
15
Mechanism deck
2
13
6
1
7
10
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
1
2
3
4
5
X-3952-392-1
3-066-225-11
3-970-608-01
3-070-883-11
3-073-832-31
COVER ASSY, TRAY
SONY BADGE (5-A)
SUMITITE (B3), +BV
SCREW, TAPPING
CASE
6
7
8
3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV
1-786-131-11 SWITCH, TACTILE
3-073-491-01 KNOB, CURSOR
9
Remark
8
Ref. No.
8-1
Part No.
Description
9
10
11
12
3-059-349-11
X-3952-245-1
1-757-693-11
1-757-694-11
LEG CUSHION
PANEL ASSY, FRONT
CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001)
CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002)
13
14
15
1-757-697-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035)
1-477-211-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D145A)
3-071-119-11 CASE, BATTERY (for RMT-D145A)
Remark
8-1-2. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY
54
not
supplied
55
53
55
52
52
52
52
51
not
supplied
52
not
supplied
52
not
supplied
not supplied
Ref. No.
Part No.
0*51
52
0 53
1-468-650-11 POWER BLOCK (HS12S1U)
3-970-608-01 SUMITITE (B3), +BVS
1-783-531-31 CORD, POWER
Description
Remark
Ref. No.
54
55
8-2
Part No.
Description
3-073-182-02 BUSHING, CODE
3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV
Remark
8-1-3. MECHANISM DECK ASSEMBLY
not supplied
not supplied
not supplied
not supplied
not supplied
not
supplied
not supplied
not supplied
not
supplied
not
supplied
102
not supplied
102
not supplied
103
102
103
101
104
103
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with
mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Ref. No.
101
102
Part No.
Description
A-6060-556-A LOADING ASSY (T)
3-053-847-11 INSULATOR
Remark
Les composants identifiés par une
marque 0 sont critiques pour la
sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
portant le numéro spécifié.
Ref. No.
Part No.
103
0 104
3-067-344-01 INSULATOR SCREW
A-6062-709-A KHM-270AAA SERVICE ASSY
8-3
Description
Remark
AV-63
8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the
parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used
on the set.
• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they
may have some difference from the original
one.
• RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: Metal-film resistor.
METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor.
F: nonflammable
• Not all of the parts for POWER BLOCK
(HS12S1U) are listed.
Ref. No.
Part No.
The components identified by mark
0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they
are seldom required for routine service.
Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example:
uA. . : µA. . uPA. . : µPA. .
uPB. .
: µPB. . uPC. . : µPC. .
uPD. .
: µPD. .
• CAPACITORS
uF: µF
• COILS
uH: µH
Description
Remark
Ref. No.
AV-63 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(Ref. No. 1,000 Series)
Les composants identifiés par une
marque 0 sont critiquens pour la
sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
portant le numéro spécifié.
When indicating parts by reference
number, please include the board.
Part No.
Description
D102
D103
D104
D201
8-719-071-15
8-719-071-15
8-719-071-15
8-719-914-43
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
Remark
D202
D205
8-719-914-44 DIODE DAP202K-T-146
8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
DAN202K-T-146
< CAPACITOR >
C101
C102
C103
C109
C110
1-162-970-11
1-126-947-11
1-163-259-91
1-165-176-11
1-126-947-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
0.01uF
47uF
220PF
0.047uF
47uF
10%
20%
5%
10%
20%
25V
16V
50V
16V
16V
C111
C112
C113
C114
C126
1-126-947-11
1-107-725-11
1-126-947-11
1-107-725-11
1-126-947-11
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
47uF
0.1uF
47uF
0.1uF
47uF
20%
10%
20%
10%
20%
16V
16V
16V
16V
16V
C201
C202
C203
C204
C205
1-163-135-00
1-163-135-00
1-163-257-11
1-163-257-11
1-163-257-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
560PF
560PF
180PF
180PF
180PF
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
50V
50V
50V
50V
50V
C206
C207
C208
C209
C222
1-163-257-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-126-960-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
180PF
0.01uF
0.01uF
1uF
0.01uF
5%
10%
10%
20%
10%
50V
25V
25V
50V
25V
C223
C224
C227
C228
C229
1-162-970-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
0.01uF
47uF
47uF
47uF
47uF
10%
20%
20%
20%
20%
25V
16V
16V
16V
16V
JR100
JR101
JR102
JR103
JR104
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
0
0
0
0
0
C231
C232
C233
C234
C242
1-126-934-11
1-163-259-91
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-924-11
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
220uF
220PF
47uF
47uF
330uF
20%
5%
20%
20%
20%
16V
50V
16V
16V
6.3V
JR105
JR106
JR107
JR108
JR109
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
0
0
0
0
0
C244
1-126-947-11 ELECT
47uF
20%
16V
< TERMINAL >
* ET101
* ET202
< IC >
IC101
IC102
IC201
IC203
IC204
J101
J103
J104
J201
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
NJM79M05DL1A (TE2)
LA73053-TLM-E
BA4558F-E2
NJM78L05UA-TE1
GP1FA550TZ
1-815-362-21
1-694-484-21
1-815-360-11
1-793-446-21
JACK, PIN (6P) (LINE OUT)
TERMINAL, S (2P.V) (S VIDEO OUT)
JACK, PIN 3P (COMPONENT VIDEO OUT)
JACK, PIN 1P (DIGITAL OUT-COAXIAL)
< SHORT >
< COIL >
L101
1-568-934-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 7P
1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR
100uH
< TRANSISTOR >
< DIODE >
D101
8-759-662-86
6-701-820-01
8-759-909-71
8-759-711-59
8-749-017-31
< JACK >
< CONNECTOR >
* CN202
1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH
1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH
Q104
Q105
Q106
8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL
8-4
8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR
8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR
8-729-424-18 TRANSISTOR
UN2213-TX
UN2111-TX
UN2113-TX
AV-63
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remark
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
IF-92
Remark
Q107
Q201
8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR
8-729-049-31 TRANSISTOR
UN2213-TX
2SB710A-RTX
R243
R249
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP
470
220
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
Q202
Q203
Q204
Q205
Q207
8-729-421-19
8-729-230-49
8-729-027-53
8-729-424-02
6-550-137-01
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
UN2213-TX
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
DTC124TKA-T146
2SB709A-QRS-TX
2SD1938 (F)-ST (TX).SO
R251
R252
R253
R254
R256
1-216-021-00
1-216-073-91
1-216-049-11
1-216-049-11
1-216-049-11
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
68
10K
1K
1K
1K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
Q208
Q211
Q216
6-550-137-01 TRANSISTOR
8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR
8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR
2SD1938 (F)-ST (TX).SO
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
2SB709A-QRS-TX
R259
R279
R280
R282
R285
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-073-91
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
RES-CHIP
0
0
0
0
10K
5%
1/10W
< RESISTOR >
R115
R121
R126
R127
R128
1-216-061-91
1-216-061-91
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
3.3K
3.3K
68
68
68
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R129
R130
R131
R133
R134
1-216-073-91
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
68
68
68
68
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R157
R158
R159
R162
R169
1-216-049-11
1-216-049-11
1-216-049-11
1-216-295-91
1-216-021-00
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT CHIP
METAL CHIP
1K
1K
1K
0
68
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
5%
1/10W
R170
R201
R202
R203
R204
1-216-021-00
1-208-798-11
1-208-798-11
1-208-798-11
1-208-798-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
68
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R205
R206
R207
R208
R209
1-208-800-11
1-208-800-11
1-216-057-00
1-216-057-00
1-216-057-00
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
5.6K
5.6K
2.2K
2.2K
2.2K
0.5%
0.5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R210
R211
R212
R213
R216
1-216-057-00
1-208-800-11
1-208-800-11
1-216-065-91
1-216-067-00
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
2.2K
5.6K
5.6K
4.7K
5.6K
5%
0.5%
0.5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R218
R219
R220
R221
R222
1-216-097-11
1-216-105-91
1-216-041-00
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
100K
220K
470
10K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R224
R225
R226
R227
R228
1-216-073-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-041-00
1-216-041-00
1-216-073-91
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
10K
47K
470
470
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R229
R230
R234
R235
R238
1-216-089-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-065-91
1-216-065-91
1-216-097-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47K
47K
4.7K
4.7K
100K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R240
R241
R242
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
470
470
470
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
< SWITCH >
S101
1-692-989-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (SCAN SELECT)
IF-92 BOARD, COMPLETE
*********************
(Ref. No. 1,000 Series)
3-067-239-01 HOLDER, FL
< BUZZER >
BZ401
1-529-986-11 BUZZER, VOLTAGE
< CAPACITOR >
C401
C407
C409
C411
C412
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-126-933-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
100uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
25V
25V
25V
16V
25V
C414
C416
C417
C419
C420
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-137-150-11
1-104-666-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
FILM
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
220uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
5%
20%
10%
25V
25V
100V
25V
25V
C421
C422
C425
C426
C427
1-162-964-11
1-115-339-11
1-119-943-91
1-128-551-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
0.001uF
0.1uF
47uF
22uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
20%
20%
10%
50V
50V
50V
25V
25V
C428
C429
C431
C432
C437
1-128-551-11
1-104-665-11
1-115-339-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
ELECT
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
22uF
100uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
20%
20%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
50V
25V
25V
C440
C441
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-126-947-11 ELECT
0.01uF
47uF
10%
20%
25V
25V
< CONNECTOR >
* CN405
CN406
1-785-530-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 10P
1-815-381-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 5P
< DIODE >
D403
D404
D405
D406
D412
8-5
8-719-041-97
8-719-041-97
8-719-041-97
8-719-041-97
8-719-017-62
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
MA113- (TX)
MA113- (TX)
MA113- (TX)
MA113- (TX)
MA8068-L-TX
IF-92
Ref. No.
D413
MB-103
Part No.
Description
Remark
Ref. No.
8-719-056-06 DIODE SLR-342DCT32 (PROG)
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB401
1-469-324-21 FERRITE
6-701-875-01
6-801-259-01
8-759-684-35
8-749-019-11
IC
IC
IC
IC
LMS8117ADTX-1.8/NOPB
86CK74AFG-3RD4 (M
S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2
GP1UD28SYK
< SHORT >
JR401
JR402
JR403
1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP
1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP
1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP
0
0
0
1-408-978-21 INDUCTOR
47uH
< FLUORESCENT INDICATOR >
ND401
1-518-806-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT INDICATOR
< IC LINK >
PS401
PS402
1-576-509-21 LINK, IC
1-576-508-21 LINK, IC
< TRANSISTOR >
Q401
Q402
Q404
Q405
8-729-056-46
8-729-056-46
8-729-048-28
8-729-424-08
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
10K
10K
10K
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
Remark
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R481
R482
R483
R484
R485
1-216-025-11
1-216-025-11
1-216-025-11
1-216-025-11
1-216-025-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
100
100
100
100
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R488
R489
R490
R496
R497
1-216-033-00
1-216-097-11
1-216-083-00
1-216-017-91
1-216-097-11
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
220
100K
27K
47
100K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
< SWITCH >
< COIL >
L401
Description
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-025-11
0uH
< IC >
IC403
IC404
IC405
IC406
Part No.
R455
R471
R473
R474
2SC5053T100Q
2SC5053T100Q
2SD1766-T100-QR
UN2111-TX
S401
S402
S403
S404
S405
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (TOP MENU)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (O RETURN)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (MENU)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (DISPLAY)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (x)
S406
S407
S408
S409
S410
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (>)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (X)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (.)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (A)
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (PICTURE MODE)
S411
S412
1-771-349-21 SWITCH, KEYBOARD (SURROUND)
1-771-349-21 SWITCH, KEYBOARD (H)
< TRANSFORMER >
T401
1-437-620-11 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERTER
< VIBRATOR >
< RESISTOR >
X401
R401
R414
R415
R416
R417
1-216-065-91
1-216-059-00
1-216-055-00
1-216-055-00
1-216-063-91
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
4.7K
2.7K
1.8K
1.8K
3.9K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R418
R421
R422
R423
R424
1-216-073-91
1-216-059-00
1-216-071-00
1-216-081-00
1-216-013-00
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
2.7K
8.2K
22K
33
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R425
R426
R427
R428
R430
1-216-025-11
1-216-063-91
1-216-063-91
1-216-071-00
1-216-059-00
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
3.9K
3.9K
8.2K
2.7K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R431
R433
R434
R435
R437
1-216-063-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-027-00
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
3.9K
10K
10K
10K
120
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R440
R444
R446
R448
R449
1-216-073-91
1-216-025-11
1-216-097-11
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
10K
100
100K
10K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R450
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
1-781-472-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (8MHz)
MB-103 BOARD, COMPLETE
***********************
(Ref. No. 2,000 Series)
< CAPACITOR >
8-6
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
1-162-970-11
1-126-209-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-914-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
100uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
9PF
10%
20%
10%
10%
0.5PF
25V
4V
25V
25V
50V
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
1-162-914-11
1-162-970-11
1-126-209-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
9PF
0.01uF
100uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.5PF
10%
20%
10%
10%
50V
25V
4V
25V
25V
C114
C118
C120
C121
C122
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C125
C126
C127
C128
C129
1-126-607-11
1-126-206-11
1-126-204-11
1-126-246-11
1-162-970-11
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
47uF
100uF
47uF
220uF
0.01uF
20%
20%
20%
20%
10%
4V
6.3V
16V
4V
25V
MB-103
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remark
C130
C201
C202
C203
C204
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-964-11
1-162-964-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.001uF
0.001uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
50V
50V
C210
C211
C212
C213
C214
1-162-966-11
1-162-966-11
1-162-966-11
1-162-966-11
1-164-245-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.0022uF
0.0022uF
0.0022uF
0.0022uF
0.015uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
C215
C216
C218
C219
C220
1-162-927-11
1-164-230-11
1-162-965-11
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
100PF
220PF
0.0015uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
C221
C225
C226
C228
C229
1-124-779-00
1-162-927-11
1-164-230-11
1-162-964-11
1-162-964-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
C230
C232
C233
C234
C235
1-162-968-11
1-162-968-11
1-162-968-11
1-126-205-11
1-162-970-11
C236
C238
C240
C241
C242
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
C308
C309
C310
C311
C312
1-126-206-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-927-11
1-162-970-11
1-110-563-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
100uF
0.01uF
100PF
0.01uF
0.068uF
20%
10%
5%
10%
10%
6.3V
25V
50V
25V
16V
50V
50V
50V
50V
25V
C313
C314
C315
C316
C317
1-164-677-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.033uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
25V
25V
50V
16V
5%
5%
10%
10%
10%
50V
50V
50V
16V
16V
C318
C319
C320
C321
C322
1-162-968-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.0047uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
50V
25V
50V
25V
25V
10uF
100PF
220PF
0.001uF
0.001uF
20%
5%
5%
10%
10%
16V
50V
50V
50V
50V
C323
C324
C325
C326
C327
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
16V
25V
25V
25V
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.0047uF
0.0047uF
0.0047uF
47uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
50V
50V
50V
6.3V
25V
C328
C329
C330
C331
C332
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
50V
16V
25V
1-164-739-11
1-124-779-00
1-164-677-11
1-107-826-11
1-126-205-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
560PF
10uF
0.033uF
0.1uF
47uF
5%
20%
10%
10%
20%
50V
16V
16V
16V
6.3V
C333
C334
C335
C337
C338
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C243
C244
C245
C246
C247
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-164-677-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.033uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
16V
25V
16V
25V
C339
C340
C343
C344
C402
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-124-779-00
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
25V
25V
25V
25V
16V
C248
C249
C250
C251
C252
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
16V
16V
C404
C406
C407
C408
C410
1-126-193-11
1-124-779-00
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
ELECT
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
1uF
10uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
20%
20%
10%
10%
10%
50V
16V
25V
25V
25V
C253
C254
C255
C256
C257
1-162-964-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-165-176-11
1-165-176-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.001uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.047uF
0.047uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
50V
25V
16V
16V
16V
C412
C413
C415
C416
C417
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C258
C259
C260
C261
C262
1-162-970-11
1-162-964-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-959-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.001uF
0.01uF
330PF
0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
5%
10%
25V
50V
25V
50V
16V
C418
C419
C422
C423
C425
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
16V
25V
25V
25V
C263
C264
C265
C266
C270
1-124-779-00
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
10uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
25V
16V
25V
25V
C426
C428
C429
C431
C432
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C271
C272
C273
C304
C305
1-126-204-11
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
47uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
16V
16V
25V
50V
C435
C436
C438
C439
C441
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
8-7
Remark
MB-103
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remark
Ref. No.
FB109
FB111
C442
C446
C447
C449
C501
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C502
C503
C504
C505
C506
1-162-964-11
1-126-205-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-126-205-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
0.001uF
47uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
47uF
10%
20%
10%
10%
20%
50V
6.3V
16V
25V
6.3V
C507
C508
C509
C510
C511
1-107-826-11
1-126-205-11
1-126-205-11
1-126-205-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
47uF
47uF
47uF
0.1uF
10%
20%
20%
20%
10%
16V
6.3V
6.3V
6.3V
16V
C512
C513
C514
C515
C516
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
16V
25V
C517
C518
C520
C521
C526
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-126-205-11
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
47uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
20%
10%
10%
25V
16V
6.3V
16V
16V
C527
C528
C529
C531
C532
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-127-715-91
1-127-715-91
1-164-315-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.22uF
0.22uF
470PF
10%
10%
10%
10%
5%
16V
25V
16V
16V
50V
C533
C534
C537
C538
C539
1-164-315-11
1-164-173-11
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
1-164-733-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
470PF
0.0039uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
820PF
5%
10%
10%
10%
10%
50V
50V
16V
16V
50V
C540
C541
C542
C543
C544
1-127-715-91
1-126-205-11
1-127-715-91
1-162-964-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.22uF
47uF
0.22uF
0.001uF
0.01uF
10%
20%
10%
10%
10%
16V
6.3V
16V
50V
25V
C545
C546
C601
C602
C603
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-964-11
1-127-715-91
1-124-779-00
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.001uF
0.22uF
10uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
25V
16V
50V
16V
16V
L101
L201
L202
C604
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
10%
25V
Q201
Q202
Part No.
Description
1-469-324-21 FERRITE
1-469-324-21 FERRITE
Remark
0uH
0uH
< FILTER >
FL101
FL102
FL103
FL104
FL105
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
FL106
FL108
FL109
FL110
FL201
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-233-893-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
FERRITE
0uH
FERRITE
0uH
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FERRITE
0uH
FERRITE
0uH
FL402
FL403
FL404
1-234-177-21 FERRITE
1-234-177-21 FERRITE
1-234-177-21 FERRITE
0uH
0uH
0uH
< IC >
IC101
IC103
IC104
IC107
IC108
8-759-643-29
6-701-877-01
6-701-837-01
6-802-252-01
6-701-874-01
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
BR24C64F-E2
SM8707EV-G-E2
MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1
MR27V3202F-7RTPZ04B
IDT71V016SA15PH8 (SCD2994)
IC201
IC202
IC301
IC302
IC303
6-701-700-01
6-701-878-01
6-701-876-01
8-759-599-45
8-759-643-10
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
SP3728ACB
FAN8034L
CXD9703R
MM1385ENLE
GM71V18160CT-6TR
IC401
IC403
IC404
IC405
IC501
6-702-300-01
8-752-416-45
6-700-353-01
6-700-353-01
8-759-588-58
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
TK11118CSCL-G
CXD1935Q
MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
MM1385NNLE
IC502
IC503
IC504
IC505
IC601
6-701-814-01
6-700-353-01
6-701-079-01
8-759-588-58
6-701-565-01
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
CXD9698R
MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
ADV7300AKST
MM1385NNLE
CXD9627A-E2
< COIL >
1-414-410-21 INDUCTOR
10uH
1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH
1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH
< TRANSISTOR >
8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR
8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR
2SB1132-T100-QR
2SB1132-T100-QR
< CONNECTOR >
< RESISTOR >
* CN102
* CN103
CN203
1-770-154-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P
1-770-470-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P
1-815-507-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB103
FB104
FB105
FB106
FB107
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
FB108
1-469-324-21 FERRITE
0uH
8-8
R103
R104
R105
R106
R108
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-789-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
100
100
100
2.2
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R110
R111
R112
R113
R114
1-216-821-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-837-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
1K
100
100
22K
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
MB-103
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
R116
R117
R118
R119
R120
1-216-801-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-845-11
1-216-845-11
1-216-821-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
22
1K
100K
100K
1K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
Remark
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
Ref. No.
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
1-216-855-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-853-11
1-216-803-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
680K
33K
470K
33
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R121
R123
R124
R128
R129
1-216-821-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
1K
10K
10K
100
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R236
R238
R239
R240
R241
1-216-803-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-839-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
33
33K
33K
33K
33K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R130
R131
R132
R133
R134
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-801-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
METAL CHIP
100
100
0
0
22
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
5%
1/10W
R242
R243
R244
R245
R246
1-216-849-11
1-216-853-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-841-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
220K
470K
1K
47K
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R136
R137
R139
R141
R150
1-216-801-11
1-216-801-11
1-216-827-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
22
22
3.3K
10K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R248
R249
R250
R251
R252
1-216-803-11
1-216-803-11
1-218-895-11
1-216-841-11
1-216-839-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
33
33
100K
47K
33K
5%
5%
0.5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R156
R157
R159
R160
R161
1-216-833-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-829-11
METAL CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
METAL CHIP
10K
0
0
0
4.7K
5%
1/10W
5%
1/10W
R253
R254
R255
R256
R259
1-218-889-11
1-218-895-11
1-218-889-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
56K
100K
56K
100
10K
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R163
R165
R166
R168
R176
1-216-827-11
1-216-827-11
1-216-065-91
1-216-827-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
3.3K
3.3K
4.7K
3.3K
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R260
R261
R262
R263
R264
1-216-834-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-815-11
1-216-861-11
1-216-845-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
12K
10K
330
2.2M
100K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R177
R178
R180
R181
R182
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
METAL CHIP
10K
10K
100
0
100
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
27K
10K
0
0
0
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1-216-838-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
5%
5%
5%
R265
R269
R273
R301
R302
R183
R184
R185
R187
R206
1-216-809-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-829-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
METAL CHIP
100
10K
1K
0
4.7K
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
5%
1/10W
R303
R311
R312
R313
R314
1-216-821-11
1-216-809-11
1-218-831-11
1-216-817-11
1-216-817-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
1K
100
220
470
470
5%
5%
0.5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R207
R210
R211
R212
R213
1-216-809-11
1-216-815-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
330
100
100
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R315
R316
R317
R318
R319
1-216-817-11
1-216-829-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-817-11
1-218-871-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
470
4.7K
10K
470
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R214
R216
R217
R218
R219
1-216-833-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-846-11
1-216-846-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
1K
1K
120K
120K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R320
R321
R322
R323
R324
1-218-883-11
1-218-879-11
1-218-847-11
1-218-855-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
33K
22K
1K
2.2K
10K
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R220
R221
R222
R223
R224
1-216-847-11
1-216-847-11
1-216-842-11
1-216-842-11
1-216-850-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
150K
150K
56K
56K
270K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R325
R326
R327
R328
R329
1-218-867-11
1-216-833-11
1-218-871-11
1-216-838-11
1-216-825-11
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
6.8K
10K
10K
27K
2.2K
5%
5%
0.5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R225
R226
R227
R229
R230
1-216-833-11
1-216-853-11
1-216-846-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-839-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
470K
120K
10K
33K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R330
R331
R332
R333
R334
1-216-825-11
1-216-825-11
1-216-825-11
1-216-847-11
1-218-853-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
2.2K
2.2K
2.2K
150K
1.8K
5%
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
8-9
Remark
MB-103
Ref. No.
MS-81
POWER BLOCK (HS12S1U)
Part No.
Description
R335
R336
R346
R347
R348
1-216-829-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
4.7K
10K
10K
10K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
Remark
R349
R351
R352
R358
R359
1-216-833-11
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
0
0
10K
10K
5%
1/10W
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
R360
R402
R405
R412
R413
1-216-809-11
1-216-295-91
1-216-809-11
1-216-833-11
1-218-867-11
METAL CHIP
SHORT
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
100
0
100
10K
6.8K
5%
1/10W
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R414
R415
R423
R426
R430
1-216-822-11
1-216-797-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-797-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
1.2K
10
10K
10K
10
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R436
R438
R439
R507
R511
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
0
0
0
100
100
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
R512
R513
R514
R536
R558
1-216-864-11
1-218-285-11
1-218-292-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
0
75
20K
100
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R559
R568
R570
R571
R573
1-216-809-11
1-216-819-11
1-216-822-11
1-216-822-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
680
1.2K
1.2K
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R574
R575
R576
R577
R578
1-218-834-11
1-218-834-11
1-218-834-11
1-218-834-11
1-218-834-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
300
300
300
300
300
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R579
R585
R601
R613
R614
1-218-834-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
300
10K
100
0
0
0.5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R619
1-216-864-11 SHORT
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remark
< VIBRATOR >
X101
X102
1-795-174-11 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (16.5MHz)
1-781-867-21 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (27MHz)
MS-81 BOARD
************
(Ref. No. 1,000 Series)
< CONNECTOR >
CN001
1-815-412-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P
< SWITCH >
S001
1-786-133-11 SWITCH, ROTARY (CHUCK/TRAY DETECT)
1-468-650-11 POWER BLOCK (HS12S1U)
**********************
(Ref. No. 1,000 Series)
< FUSE >
0 F101
1-533-296-11 FUSE (2A/125V)
MISCELLANEOUS
**************
7
11
12
13
0 53
1-786-131-11
1-757-693-11
1-757-694-11
1-757-697-11
1-783-531-31
SWITCH, TACTILE
CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001)
CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002)
CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035)
CORD, POWER
0 104
A-6062-709-A KHM-240AAA SERVICE ASSY
ACCESSORIES & PACKING MATERIALS
*******************************
1-477-211-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D145A)
1-751-271-11 CORD, CONNECTION
(STEREO AV CABLE 1.5m)
3-074-927-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
3-074-927-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH) (Canadian)
3-071-119-11 CASE, BATTERY (for RMT-D145A)
0
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK >
* RB102
1-233-270-11 NETWORK, RES (8 GANG) 10K
< VARIABLE RESISTOR >
RV501
RV502
1-223-583-41 RES, ADJ, CARBON (3 TYPE) 1K
(VIDEO LEVEL ADJ)
1-223-583-41 RES, ADJ, CARBON (3 TYPE) 1K
(PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJ)
8-10
8-10E
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with
mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une
marque 0 sont critiques pour la
sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
portant le numéro spécifié.
DVP-NS715P
Sony Corporation
9-929-720-11
Home Video Campany
– 128 –
2002E0500-1
© 2002. 5
Published by Quality Assurance Dept.